Ricoh Aficio MP 3500 Series Page 317 Service Manual Download

Page: 317 / 908

SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES

SM 5-57

B291/B295/B296/B297

Service

Tables

Initialize LDAP Addr Book

5846 49

Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the LDAP

address book that is controlled by UCS.

Initialize All Addr Book

5846 50

Clears everything (including users codes) in the directory information managed by

UCS. However, the accounts and passwords of the system administrators are not

deleted.

Backup All Addr Book

5846 51

Uploads all directory information to the SD card.

Restore All Addr Book

5846 52

Downloads all directory information from the SD card.

Clear Backup Info.

5846 53

Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot. Deletes only the

files uploaded for that machine. This feature does not work if the card is write-

protected.

Note

: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not

remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing.

Search Option

This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local

address book.

Bit Meaning

Checks both upper/lower case characters

Japan Only

--- Not Used ---

5846 60

--- Not Used ---

Complexity Option 1

5846 62

Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address

book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the

length of the password.

[0~32/1]

Note

•

This SP does not normally require adjustment.

•

This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group

password policy to control access to the address book.

Complexity Option 2

5846 63

Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address

book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case and defines the

length of the password.

[0~32/1]

Note

•

This SP does not normally require adjustment.

•

This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group

password policy to control access to the address book.

CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA

Summary of Contents for Aficio MP 3500 Series

Page 1: ...B291 B295 B296 B297 SERVICE MANUAL 002927MIU CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 2: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 3: ...B291 B295 B296 B297 SERVICE MANUAL CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 4: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 5: ...B291 B295 B296 B297 SERVICE MANUAL 002927MIU CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 6: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 7: ...RPORATION All product names domain names or product illustrations including desktop images used in this document are trademarks registered trademarks or the property of their respective companies They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for the benefit of such companies No such use or the use of any trade name or web site is intended to convey endorsemen...

Page 8: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 9: ...anual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury damage to property or loss of warranty protection Ricoh Corporation WARNING CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 10: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 11: ...1 DSm735eg Aficio MP 3500g 8035eg B295 DSm745eg Aficio MP 4500g 8045eg B296 DSm735e LD335 Aficio MP 3500 8035e B297 DSm745e LD345 Aficio MP 4500 8045e DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV NO DATE COMMENTS 01 2007 Original Printing CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 12: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 13: ...NSTALLATION B542 1 20 1 4 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 1 20 1 4 2 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 21 1 5 1 BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION B544 1 25 1 5 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 1 25 1 5 2 1 BIN TRAY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 26 1 6 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION B538 1 32 1 6 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 1 32 1 6 2 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 33 1 7 TWO TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION B545 1 35 1 7 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 1 35 1 ...

Page 14: ... 19 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT B770 1 75 1 19 1 ACCESSORIES 1 75 1 19 2 INSTALLATION 1 76 1 20 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION B815 1 77 1 20 1 ACCESSORIES 1 77 1 20 2 INSTALLATION 1 78 Pre installation 1 79 On Site Installation 1 85 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 2 1 2 1 PM TABLE 2 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3 1 3 1 GENERAL CAUTIONS 3 1 ...

Page 15: ...11 4 CHARGE ROLLER AND CLEANING ROLLER 3 34 3 11 5 DRUM CLEANING BLADE 2 3 35 3 11 6 DRUM CLEANING BLADE 1 3 36 3 11 7 ID SENSOR 3 37 3 12 DEVELOPMENT 3 38 3 12 1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3 38 3 12 2 DEVELOPMENT FILTER 3 39 3 12 3 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER 3 40 3 12 4 DEVELOPER 3 41 3 12 5 TD SENSOR 3 43 3 13 TRANSFER UNIT 3 44 3 13 1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT 3 44 3 13 2 TRANSFER BELT 3 45 3 13 3 TRANSFER BELT CLEANIN...

Page 16: ...VAL 3 74 3 17 2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR REPLACEMENT 3 75 3 17 3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT 3 76 3 18 DRIVE AREA 3 77 3 18 1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH TRANSFER BELT CONTACT CLUTCH 3 77 3 18 2 MAIN MOTOR 3 78 3 18 3 FUSING EXIT MOTOR 3 79 3 18 4 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR 3 80 3 19 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS 3 81 3 19 1 NVRAM 3 81 3 19 2 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 3 83 3 19 3 IOB 3 84 IOB DIP Switch Settings SW101 ...

Page 17: ...4 xxx Scanner 5 19 SP5 xxx Mode 5 35 SP6 xxx Peripherals 5 68 SP7 xxx Data Log 5 70 SP8 xxx Data Log2 5 76 5 2 4 TEST PATTERN PRINTING SP2 902 5 109 Test Pattern Table SP2 902 2 IPU Test Print 5 109 Test Pattern Table SP2 902 3 Printing Test Patterns 5 110 5 2 5 INPUT CHECK 5 111 Main Machine Input Check SP5 803 5 111 ARDF Input Check SP6 007 5 115 5 2 6 OUTPUT CHECK 5 116 Main Machine Output Chec...

Page 18: ... SAVE DEBUG LOG 5 134 5 8 2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD 5 138 5 8 3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY 5 138 5 8 4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES 5 139 SP5857 015 Copy SD Card to SD Card Any Desired Key 5 139 SP5857 016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log 5 139 SP5857 017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log 5 139 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 6 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 6 1 6 1 OVERVIEW 6 1 6 1 1 CO...

Page 19: ...ION 6 32 6 5 12 FILTERING 6 33 Interactive SP Codes 6 33 Text Mode MTF Filter 6 38 Text Photo Photo Mode Filter 6 39 Pale Generation Mode Filter 6 40 Photo Mode Smoothing for Dithering 6 41 Photo Mode Grayscale 6 41 Photo Mode Image Quality 6 42 6 5 13 OTHERS 6 43 Vertical Black Line Correction 6 43 Density Settings 6 43 ADS Level 6 44 6 5 14 PRACTICAL APPLICATION OF SP MODES 6 45 Solving Problems...

Page 20: ... END DETECTION 6 67 Toner Near End 6 67 Toner End 6 67 6 9 7 TONER END RECOVERY 6 68 6 9 8 TONER SUPPLY WITH ABNORMAL SENSORS 6 68 6 10 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING 6 69 6 10 1 DRUM CLEANING 6 69 6 10 2 TONER RECYCLING 6 69 6 11 PAPER FEED 6 70 6 11 1 OVERVIEW 6 70 6 11 2 PAPER FEED DRIVE 6 71 6 11 3 PICK UP AND SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM 6 71 6 11 4 PAPER LIFT 6 72 6 11 5 PAPER END ...

Page 21: ...RLER ROLLERS 6 92 6 15 6 PRESSURE ROLLER 6 93 6 15 7 CLEANING MECHANISM 6 94 6 15 8 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER CLEANING 6 95 Small Jobs 6 95 Medium Jobs 6 96 Large Jobs 6 96 SP Settings for Post Job Cleaning 6 97 6 15 9 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL 6 98 Temperature Control 6 99 Fusing Idling Temperature 6 100 6 15 10 CPM DOWN FOR THICK PAPER 6 101 6 15 11 OVERHEAT PROTECTION 6 101 6 16 ENERGY SAVER MODES 6...

Page 22: ...43 SEE SECTION B543 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 BIN TRAY B544 SEE SECTION B544 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS TWO TRAY FINISHER B545 SEE SECTION B545 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS BOOKLET FINISHER B546 SEE SECTION B546 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B714 SEE SECTION B714 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS FAX OPTION B779 SEE SECTION B779 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENT...

Page 23: ...The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands 7 To prevent a fire or explosion keep the machine away from flammable liquids gases and aerosols HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS 1 Toner and developer are non toxic but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident it may cause tempor...

Page 24: ... the repair of laser based optical units in the field The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer The laser chassis is not repairable in the field Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service ...

Page 25: ...The following headings provide special information WARNING FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH CAUTION Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries NOTE This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine Lengthwise SEF Short Edge Feed Sideways LEF Long Edge Feed CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLA...

Page 26: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 27: ...HOOTING PUNCH UNIT B377 1000 SHEET FINISHER B408 TWO TRAY FINISHER B545 BOOKLET FINISHER B546 PRINTER SCANNER OPTION D315 SERVICE TABLES DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS SPECIFICATIONS 1 BIN TRAY B544 BRIDGE UNIT B538 TAB POSITION 2 TAB POSITION 1 TAB POSITION 3 TAB POSITION 4 TAB POSITION 6 TAB POSITION 5 TAB POSITION 8 TAB POSITION 7 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 28: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 29: ...INSTALLATION CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 30: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 31: ...TE The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data 1 1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS CAUTION B135I016 WMF Rating Voltage of Output Connector Max DC24 V LCT Rating Voltage of Output Connector Max DC24 V Finisher ...

Page 32: ...as directly exposed to heat from a heater 7 Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases 8 Do not install the machine at any location over 2 000 m 6 500 ft above sea level 9 Place the main machine on a strong and level base Inclination on any side should be no more than 5 mm 0 2 10 Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations 1 1 2 MACHINE LEVEL F...

Page 33: ...ource providing clearance as shown NOTE The 75 cm 29 5 recommended for the space at the front is for pulling out the paper tray only If the operator stands at the front of the main machine more space is required B135I010 WMF A Front 75 cm 29 6 B Left 10 cm 4 C Rear 10 cm 4 D Right 10 cm 4 B C D A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 34: ...STALLATION REQUIREMENTS B291 B295 B296 B297 SM 1 4 1 Without tray extended B195I012 WMF B195I014 WMF 670 mm 26 4 180 mm 7 1 680 mm 26 8 670 mm 23 4 520 mm 20 5 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 35: ...easily accessible Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet 2 Avoid multi wiring 3 Be sure to ground the machine 1 Input voltage level North America 120 V 60 Hz More than 12 5 A Europe Asia 220 V 240V 50 Hz 60 Hz more than 6 8 A 2 Permissible voltage fluctuation 10 to 15 3 Never set anything on the power cord CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 36: ...equirements See Overall Machine Information Installation Option Table Unpack Copier Install the copier Install the bridge unit if required Install the remaining options in any order Place Copier on the paper tray unit Install the paper tray unit Does the user require the Paper Tray Unit LCT or Finisher Yes No If the customer requires the 1 bin tray Remove the scanner unit Install the 1 bin tray Re...

Page 37: ... 3 Exposure Glass Cleaner Holder 1 4 Exposure Glass Cleaner 1 5 Paper Size Decal 1 6 Toner Supply Installation Decal 1 7 Middle Front Cover 1 8 HDD Caution Decals 17 29 57 Machines 1 9 Model Name Decal 17 19 29 57 Machines 1 10 Stamp 17 Machine 1 11 EU Safety Information 26 27 57 67 Machines 1 12 Operation Panel Indicator Decals 26 27 57 67 Machines 1 13 Gasket for Optional ARDF 26 27 29 57 67 Mac...

Page 38: ...pping materials A 3 Remove scanner cushion B NOTE Do not discard the cushion Store it inside the machine at C You should install it the next time you move the machine 4 Remove the middle front cover from the 2nd tray 5 On the right side of the machine open the by pass tray duplex unit and transfer right cover 6 Remove the shipping screws D x2 and tags 7 Remove the other shipping tag E NOTE If the ...

Page 39: ... installed install the middle front cover A provided in the second paper tray 9 Attach the emblem B and panel C to the front cover D 10 Push the panel in until the emblem and panel move into their positions with an audible click B195I101 WMF B195I103 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 40: ...n the front door 2 Loosen A x 1 do not remove 3 Push the base B to the left 4 Open the right cover C 5 Raise the lever D 6 Pull out the PCU E and place it on a clean flat surface 7 Remove clamps and wire F B195I900 WMF B195I511 WMF A B C D E F CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 41: ...the area is free of pins paper clips staples etc to avoid attraction to the magnetic development roller 9 Slide the development unit A out and place it on the paper 10 Remove the tape and tag B from the development unit 11 Remove the entrance seal plate C x 2 B135I512 WMF B135I105 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 42: ...ur approximately 1 3 of the developer evenly along the length of the development unit 2 Rotate the drive gear C to work the developer into the unit 3 Repeat until all the developer is in the development unit 4 Continue to turn the drive gear until the developer is even with the top of the unit 14 Reassemble the development unit NOTE Make sure that the earth plate D is positioned correctly 15 Re in...

Page 43: ...and set the bottle in the holder NOTE Do not touch the inner bottle cap E 3 Push the toner bottle holder into the main machine until it locks in place and then lower the holder lever A to secure the toner bottle NOTE The holder lever cannot be lowered until the toner bottle has been installed 4 Attach the toner supply installation decal E B195I514 WMF B195I101B WMF B C E D A E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

Page 44: ...rn the dial D to the correct setting for the paper size 4 Pinch the sides of the bottom fence E and move it to the appropriate mark for the paper size then load the paper 5 Check the position of the stack Confirm that there is no gap between the stack and the side fences If you see a gap adjust the position of the side fences After loading the stack confirm that the right side of the stack is not ...

Page 45: ... Attach the appropriate paper size decal B to the paper tray 8 Paper size decals are also used for the optional paper tray unit Keep any remaining decals for use with the paper tray unit 9 Repeat this procedure to load paper in the 2nd paper tray B135I108 WMF B135I110 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 46: ...n press 7 When the message prompts you to enter the lot number of the developer enter the 7 digit lot number press Yes and then press Execute on the touch panel This initializes the TD sensor NOTE The lot number is printed on the end of the developer package Recording the lot number could help troubleshoot problems later If the lot number is unavailable enter any seven digit number 8 Press SP Dire...

Page 47: ...y The 1st 2nd 3rd and 4th paper trays are provided with paper size dial selectors The dial settings on the paper trays have priority over the UP settings However if you select the asterisk position on the paper size dial you can select the paper size with the UP setting 8 Check the copy quality and machine operation NOTE The test pattern print procedure is slightly different for this machine Use S...

Page 48: ... The electrical total counter no longer requires initialization The new incrementing counter is set to 0 at the factory HDD Caution Decal 1 Attach the HDD Caution decal A to the front cover 10 mm 0 4 25 mm 1 0 B135I017 WMF B195I018 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 49: ...xposure glass cleaner holder A to the left side of the machine 2 Place the exposure glass cleaner B inside the holder NOTE The exposure glass cleaner is used to clean the ARDF exposure glass the glass strip to the left of the large exposure glass B135I111 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 50: ... 1 4 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list Description Q ty 1 Knob Screw M3 1 2 Knob Screw M4 1 3 Joint Bracket 1 4 Front Stand 1 5 Rear Stand 1 6 Stand Bracket 1 7 Installation Procedure 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 51: ...ER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Unpack the paper tray unit 2 Remove all tape and shipping materials 3 Remove the paper trays A B542I112 WMF B542I557 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 52: ... on the bottom of the machine NOTE Do not hold the scanner unit 7 Re install the middle front cover A 8 Attach the spring washer E to the short knob screw F Then secure the paper tray unit 9 Open the right cover of the paper tray unit G 10 Secure the joint bracket H 1 long knob screw 11 Remove the connector cover I of the main machine x 1 12 Connect the paper tray unit harness J to the main machin...

Page 53: ...TALLATION B542 SM B291 B295 B296 B297 1 23 Installation 13 Install the front stand A and rear stand B as shown above 14 Install the stand bracket C B542I518 WMF B542I119 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 54: ...aper trays 16 Attach the appropriate tray decals A which are included in the accessory box for the main machine 17 Turn on the ac switch 18 Turn the paper size dial to the correct setting for the paper size 19 Check the machine s operation and copy quality B542I500 WMF A A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 55: ...e accessories in the box against the following list Description Q ty 1 Ground Bracket 1 2 Connector Cover 1 3 Base Cover 1 4 Arm Cover 1 5 Copy Tray 1 6 Mylar Strip 2 7 Stepped Screw M3 x 8 5 8 Screw M3 x 8 2 9 Screw M4 x 7 1 10 Tapping Screw M3 x 6 2 11 Tapping Screw M3 x 14 1 12 Tapping Screw M3 x 8 1 13 Installation Procedure 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 56: ...n machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Remove Scanner Unit NOTE If the ARDF is installed remove the ARDF before removing the scanner unit Remove the connector cover A Disconnect the scanner cable B Remove the scanner unit C x 3 B544I114 WMF B544I113 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 57: ...x 1 from the top of the paper exit cover C 4 Remove the paper exit cover C x 4 5 Cut away two covers D from the base cover E 6 Trim the edges so they are smooth 7 Install the base cover E x 3 stepped screw 8 Set the 1 bin tray unit F on the base cover and slide onto the heads of the stepped screws B544I201 WMF B544I102 WMF A B C D E F CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 58: ...10 Remove the cover B 11 Install the grounding bracket C x 2 M3 x 6 12 Connect the harness D 13 Install the connector cover E x 1 M3 x 8 14 Re install the front bracket F x 2 M4 x 7 M4 x 10 and the rear bracket G x 1 M4 x 10 B544I492 WMF B544I103 WMF A B C D E F G CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 59: ... into the side of the 1 bin tray housing 2 Attach the copy tray B to the stepped screws Bridge Unit B538 has been installed 1 Open the cover of the bridge unit C 2 First remove the copy tray bracket D x 1 3 Install the copy tray bracket x 1 tapping screw 4 Re install the copy tray E x 1 B544I493 WMF B544I501 WMF A B C D E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 60: ...e scanner stand first remove B x 2 to release the scanner stand C 18 Raise the scanner stand until the next set of screw holes in the main frame can be seen through the screw holes in the scanner stand 19 Secure the stand x 2 and install the arm cover D x 1 B544I104 WMF B544I500 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 61: ...31 Installation 20 Attach two mylar strips A to the scanner stand B 21 Reinstall the scanner stand cover 22 Reinstall the scanner unit 23 Turn on the main switch and check the 1 bin tray unit operation B544I106 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 62: ...NIT INSTALLATION B538 1 6 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list Description Q ty 1 Stepped Screw 2 2 Connector Cover 1 3 Exit Mylar 2 4 Installation Procedure 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 63: ...k the bridge unit and remove all tapes shipping retainers 2 Remove the inner tray A 3 On the side of the machine remove the three small covers B If the optional external output tray A825 will be installed instead of a finisher do Step 4 4 Remove the two small covers C 5 Remove the cover D x 1 6 Remove the cap E B538I407 WMF B538I500 WMF B538I401 WMF D B E A C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROL...

Page 64: ...the bridge unit 8 Remove the cover B 9 Install the bridge unit C x 2 10 Connect the bridge unit I F harnesses D x 2 11 Install the connector cover E 12 Turn on the main switch and check the bridge unit operation make sure that there are no paper jams B538I402 WMF B538I404 WMF A B D C E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 65: ...545 1 7 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list Description Q ty 1 Front Joint Bracket 1 2 Rear Joint Bracket 1 3 Shift Tray 2 4 Screw M4 x 8 2 5 Screw M4 x 12 5 6 Ground Plate 1 7 Installation Procedure 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 66: ...ed before installing this finisher 1 Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and shipping retainers from outside the unit A 2 Open the front door B and remove all tapes and shipping materials from inside the finisher unit 3 Save the retainer C and other shipping material NOTE The retainer C must be re installed in the finisher before moving or shipping the finisher to another location B545I107 WM...

Page 67: ...er of the paper tray unit as shown 6 Open the front door of the finisher and pull out the locking lever D x 1 7 Push the finisher to the side of the machine with the holes in the finisher aligned with the joint brackets and then dock the finisher against the machine 8 Push in the locking lever and secure it x 1 then close the front door B545I104 WMF B545I105 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA ...

Page 68: ...297 SM 1 38 9 Install two trays A x 1 each 10 Connect the finisher cable B to the main machine below the right rear handle 11 Turn on the main switch and check the finisher operation B545I103 WMF B545I106 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 69: ...1 8 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list Description Q ty 1 Punch unit 1 2 Sensor arm 1 3 Hopper 1 4 Step screw 1 5 Spring 1 6 Spacer 2 mm 1 7 Spacer 1 mm 1 8 Tapping screw 1 9 Tapping screw 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 70: ...ts power cord If the Two Tray Finisher is installed disconnect it and pull it away from the machine 1 7 1 Unpack the punch unit and remove all tapes and shipping retainers 2 Open the front door and remove the rear cover A x4 3 Remove the bracket B x2 and paper guide C x 1 B377I102 WMF B377I103 WMF B C A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 71: ...Installation 4 Remove the hopper cover A x 2 5 Install the sensor bracket B stepped x 1 6 Install the spring C 7 Install the 2 mm spacer D 8 Install the punch unit E x 2 stepped x 1 B377I101 WMF B377I104 WMF A B C D E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 72: ...ication signal to the machine board so it knows what type of punch unit has been installed 10 Slide the hopper B into the machine 11 Fasten the two 1 mm spacers C to the rear frame for future adjustment NOTE The spacers are used to adjust the horizontal positioning of the holes 12 Reassemble the finisher and check the punch operation B377I105 WMF B377I106 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO C...

Page 73: ...on of the accessories in the box against the following list Description Q ty 1 Stepped Screw 2 2 Screw M4 x 10 2 3 Attention Decal Scanner 1 4 Attention Decal Top Cover 1 5 Installation Procedure 1 NOTE The gasket and ferrite core for the ARDF are provided with the accessories of the main machine 1 3 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 74: ...7 SM 1 44 1 9 2 ARDF INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Unpack the ARDF and remove all tapes and shipping retainers B714I502 WMF CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 75: ...the machine NOTE To avoid damaging the ARDF hold it as shown 4 Secure the ARDF with the screws 5 Attach the gasket C NOTE The gasket is provided as an accessory with the mainframe 6 Attach the ferrite core D to the I F cable E NOTE The ferrite core is provided as an accessory with the mainframe 7 Connect the I F cable the main machine B541I900A WMF B541I900B WMF A B C D E 0 to 1 mm 0 to 1 5 mm CÓP...

Page 76: ... 8 Peel off the platen sheet A and place it on the exposure glass 9 Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner B on the exposure glass 10 Close the ARDF B541I902 WMF B541I901 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 77: ... to the cover so that the arrow on the decal lines up with the groove C of the left scale as shown As with step 11 choose the language most suitable for the machine installed 13 Turn on the main switch 14 Check the ARDF operation and copy quality Be sure to check and adjust the registration for the ARDF with the SP modes B541I906 WMF B541I903 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 78: ...MENT 1 Remove the tape A covering the elliptical hole 2 Remove right screw B and install it into the elliptical hole C 3 Move the right side of the ARDF forward or back to adjust the position then tighten the screw B079I901 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 79: ...1 10 LCT INSTALLATION B543 1 10 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list Description Q ty 1 Joint Pin 2 2 Stepped Screw M3 x 18 4 3 Installation Procedure 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 80: ...binet FAC25 must be installed before installing the LCT 1 Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes 2 Open the right cover of the paper tray unit A 3 Open the lower right cover B and cut the holding band C NOTE When cutting the holding band the upper part of the band should be cut as shown Otherwise paper jams may occur 4 Remove the lower right cover B543I504 WMF C B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CON...

Page 81: ...e the LCT to the right front view 7 Hang the LCT C on the joint pins then secure the brackets D x 4 8 Return the LCT to the previous position and connect the LCT cable E 9 Open the LCT cover and load the paper 10 Turn on the ac switch and check the LCT operation B543I503 WMF E D C B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 82: ...1 52 1 11 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION G329 1 Install A x 2 on the top cover as shown 2 Position the platen cover bracket B on the heads of the stud screws and slide the platen cover C to the left B079I904 WMF A A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 83: ...y and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list Description Q ty 1 Upper Tray 1 2 Shift Tray 1 3 Tapping Screw M4 x 6 2 4 Rail Ass y 1 5 Joint Bracket 1 6 Tapping Screw M4 x 16 8 7 Rail Bracket 1 8 Tapping Screw M4 x 6 1 9 Harness Cover 1 10 Sensor Feeler 1 B546I101 WMF 1 2 10 4 5 3 7 8 9 6 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 84: ... NOTE The bridge unit B538 and paper tray unit B542 must be installed before installing this finisher CAUTION Keep the power cord unplugged when starting the following procedure 1 Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes and shipping retainers B546I104 WMF B546I102 WMF CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 85: ...3 Remove the stapler unit lock plate B x 1 4 Push in the stapler unit and shut the front lower door 5 Remove the right lower cover C x 4 6 Remove the front pressure release bracket D x 1 7 Remove the rear pressure release bracket E x 1 8 Reattach the cover C B546I105 WMF B546I103 WMF A B C E D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 86: ... 9 Set the hooks A of the shift tray B in the notches in the shift tray bracket and secure the tray x2 M4 10 Connect the shift tray sensor harness C 11 Install the harness cover D 2 hooks B546I106 WMF B546I107 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 87: ... tray A 2 pins 13 Attach the sensor feeler B 2 pins 14 Remove the stand bracket C 15 Attach the rail D to the rail bracket E as shown 16 Install the rail bracket F on the left lower cover of the copier x 4 B546I108 WMF B546I921 WMF B546I801 WMF A B D E F C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 88: ...re the rail B to the booklet finisher with 1 M4 screw 19 Align the finisher on the joint bracket and lock the 2 hooks C of the finisher on the joint bracket 20 Connect the finisher cable D to the copier 21 Turn on the main switch and check the finisher operation B546I920 WMF B546I511 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 89: ... the following list Description Q ty 1 Front Joint Bracket 1 2 Rear Joint Bracket 1 1 3 Rear Joint Bracket 1 4 Grounding Plate 1 5 Copy Tray 1 6 Staple Position Decal 1 7 Screw M4 x 14 4 8 Knob Screw M4 x 10 1 9 Screw M3 x 8 1 10 Knob Screw M3 x 8 1 1 Rear joint bracket is not required for these models B408I502 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 6 7 10 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 90: ...fore starting the following procedure 1 The following options must be installed before installing this finisher Bridge Unit B538 Paper Tray Unit B542 2 Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes NOTE Be sure to keep screw A It will be needed to secure the grounding plate in Step 4 B408I102 WMF B408I103 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 91: ...TE Use the screw removed in step 2 and the screw from the accessory box 5 Open the front door D then pull the locking lever E 6 Align the finisher on the joint brackets and lock it in place by pushing the locking lever 7 Secure the locking lever x 1 knob screw M3 x 8 8 Close the front door 9 Install the copy tray F x 1 knob screw M4 x 10 B408I503 WMF B408I201 WMF A B C D E F CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA C...

Page 92: ...F 10 Connect the finisher cable A to the main machine below the right rear handle 11 Attach the staple position decal B to the ARDF as shown 12 Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation B408I504 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 93: ...plates A on the inside of the key counter bracket B and insert the key counter holder C 2 Secure the key counter holder to the bracket x2 3 Attach the key counter cover D x2 4 Remove the connector cover E 5 Remove the knockout F from the connector cover 6 Remove the rear upper cover G x4 and left corner cover H x2 A683I518 WMF B543I001 WMF A B C D E F G H CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 94: ...R INSTALLATION B291 B295 B296 B297 SM 1 64 7 Connect the key counter connector A to CN211 on the I O board 8 Reinstall the covers B and C A683I002 WMF A683I003 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 95: ...the left side of the scanner unit NOTE When attaching the key counter assembly press the assembly hard against the scanner cover Otherwise the key counter assembly may come off easily 11 Push User Tools System Settings Key Counter Management 12 Set the following key counter functions to ON or OFF as necessary Copier Document server Facsimile Scanner Printer A683I965 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPI...

Page 96: ...scanner unit x2 x1 3 Remove the knockout B 4 Push the 1st and 2nd scanners C to the right 5 Lift the harness guide D 6 Install the heater brackets E x2 M3x6 NOTE Use the screws already attached at the same position 7 Install the heater F x2 M4x6 and route the harness B004I204 WMF B004I205 WMF B004I206 WMF E F A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 97: ... knockout J 11 Pull out ac harness K 12 Connect the ac harness L to the ac outlet M NOTE Do not remove the ground wire from the ac outlet 13 Install the ac outlet M 14 Install the ground wire N x1 M4x6 15 Re install the rear cover rear lower cover 16 Connect the harness O B004I207 WMF B004I208 WMF B004I209 WMF B004I210 WMF G H I J K L M N O CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 98: ...2 Install the harness holder C 3 Remove the rear lower cover 4 Remove the upper and lower paper trays from the main machine 5 Install the heater assembly D x1 6 Install the harness clamp E 7 Fasten the harness F with the clamp 8 Route the heater harness G and connect it to the ac harness H B195I202 WMF B004I531 WMF B004I203 WMF A B C E G F H D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 99: ...wing procedure 1 Attach the optional tray heater A to the heater bracket B 2 Install the harness holder C 3 Remove the rear lower cover of the machine and the rear cover of the optional paper tray unit 4 Remove the upper and lower paper trays of the optional paper tray unit 5 Install the heater assembly D x1 B004I531 WMF B195I201 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 100: ...ONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT B291 B295 B296 B297 SM 1 70 6 Install four harness clamps A 7 Route the harness B and connect it to the harness C and heater harness D B004I203 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 101: ...rtant These settings must be set up by the customer before the Data Overwrite Security unit can be installed 3 Confirm that Admin Authentication is on User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Admin Authentication On If this setting is Off tell the customer that this setting must be On before you can do the installation procedure 4 Confirm that Administ...

Page 102: ... that a tape is attached to each corner The surfaces of the tapes must be blank If you see VOID on the tapes do not install the components in the box 2 If the surfaces of the tapes do not show VOID remove them from the corners of the box 3 When you remove each seal the VOID marks B can be seen In this condition they cannot be reattached to the box B735I901 WMF B735I903 WMF B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

Page 103: ...main power switch off 5 Remove the SD card slot cover A x1 6 With the printed side of the SD card B facing the rear of the machine install the SD card in SD card slot C2 7 Reconnect the network cable if the network is connected to the copier 8 Turn the main power switch on 9 Do SP5 878 and push EXECUTE 10 Go out of the SP mode turn the operation switch off then turn the main power switch off Check...

Page 104: ...lot 2 4 Do the DOS unit installation procedure again 4 Push User Tools and select System Settings Administrator Tools Auto Erase Memory Settings On 5 Exit User Tools mode 6 Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon A is displayed 7 Make a Sample Copy 8 Check the overwrite erase icon The icon B changes to C when job data is stored in the hard disk The icon goes back to its usual...

Page 105: ... 1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list Description Qty 1 Bracket 1 2 Screws 4 3 FFC Short 1 4 Harness Short 1 5 FFC Long Not Used 1 6 Harness Long Not Used 1 7 Harness Clamp Not Used 1 8 ICIB 1 B770I101 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 106: ...ttach the bracket D x2 4 Attach the ICIB E x4 5 Connect the short FFC F 6 Connect the short harness G x2 7 Reinstall the controller box 8 Turn on the machine 9 Enable the Copy Data Security Function User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Copy Data Security Option B770I102 WMF B770I103A WMF B770I104 WMF A B D E F G C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 107: ... Ass y 1 4 Upper Right Cover 1 5 Spring Plates Operation Panel 2 6 Hinge Stopper Right 1 7 Hinge Stopper Left 1 8 Adjusting Pin Spacers 2 9 Clamp NK 8N 1 10 Ferrite Core RFC 8 1 11 Tapping Screw M3x6 Blue 1 12 Tapping Screws M3x6 5 13 Tapping Screw M3x8 1 14 Tapping Screws M3x14 4 15 Screws with Spring Washer M4x6 1 16 Knob Screws M4 4 17 Harness Bands 2 18 Cable Cover 1 B815I100 WMF 10 11 12 13 1...

Page 108: ...k the customer about their requirements before you install the unit Specific Requirements The scanner unit cable should not touch the floor The cables should not hang free where they can become entangled with other equipment or furniture such as a wheelchair The unit should be positioned within 380 to 1220 mm 1 3 to 4 ft above the floor The gap between the scanner and the main unit on the left rig...

Page 109: ...Installation Move the Scanner Unit to Its Accessible Location Remove the Horizontal Arm Connect the Long Scanner I F Cable to the Copier Replace the Front Rubber Feet with the Adjustment Screws Connect the Scanner Pre installation Remove Short Scanner Cable 1 If the ARDF is attached remove it 2 Remove A Rear scale x3 B Left scale and exposure glass x2 3 Remove scanner rear cover C x2 B815I101 WMF ...

Page 110: ...ensor forward toward the front It is not necessary to disconnect or remove the sensor E Ground wire E x1 F Short scanner I F cable x2 6 Remove the rear cover G x5 x1 7 Remove the connector cap H and disconnect the short scanner I F cable I from the mainframe x1 x1 8 Pull the short scanner I F cable out of the scanner unit B815I102 WMF B815I104A WMF B815I105 WMF A C B G H I D E F CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLA...

Page 111: ...ground wire and cable loop behind the large boss 3 Reattach Pg 1 80 Original length sensor x1 Lens block assembly x4 Lens block cover x4 4 Set the collar E of the long scanner I F cable in the bracket and clamp the cable x1 5 Reinstall rear bracket F x5 x2 6 Pull the ferrite core G slightly away from the back of the machine 7 Reattach Pg 1 79 Scanner rear cover x2 Rear scale x3 Exposure glass and ...

Page 112: ... Pull the operation panel away from the copier do not disconnect or remove and turn it over 3 Peel the covers from the anti static springs B and attach them as shown 4 Press down gently on each spring to confirm that each spring is attached securely 5 Reattach the operation panel to the machine x2 0 1mm 0 1mm B815I107 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 113: ...815 SM B291 B295 B296 B297 1 83 Installation Replace the Board Shield Plates 1 Remove Corner plate A x2 Rear upper cover B x2 2 Remove controller box C x5 x1 B815I108 WMF B770I103A WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 114: ...te and attach them to the new plate x5 5 Reattach New IPU shield plate x2 Controller box x5 x1 Reattach rear lower cover x4 Reattach the corner plate x2 ARDF Important This completes the pre installation procedure for this option The mainframe can now be moved to the work site B815I110 WMF B815I111 WMF A B B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 115: ... right cover and replace it with the cover B provided with the Scanner Accessibility Option x2 M3 x14 3 Attach the paper exit cover C provided with the option x2 Remove the Horizontal Arm 1 Remove Right cover A x1 Left cover B x2 2 To remove the horizontal arm C of the scanner stand remove these screws Top D x2 Right side E x6 NOTE Keep these screws They are needed to fasten the cable cover in Ste...

Page 116: ...ket B 2 Fasten the bracket to the side of the housing C x2 3 Connect the cable D to the cable connector x1 4 Use the screws removed in Step 2 on the previous page to fasten the cable cover E over the cable connection and the vertical post F of the scanner stand x4 5 Fasten the cable clamp G as shown x1 B815I115 WMF A B C D E F G CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 117: ...ad screwdriver B behind the metal bracket C and dislodge the plastic pin D 3 Pull out the plastic pin and remove the rubber foot E 4 Remove the seal F from the adjusting pin spacer G then attach the pin spacer to the scanner unit 5 Turn the metal foot H until it stops 6 Reinstall the cover A x3 7 Repeat Steps 2 to 5 at the left front B815I116 WMF B815I117 WMF A B C D E F G H F G CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLA...

Page 118: ...Attach one ferrite core B near the cable connector NOTE The ferrite core is provided as an accessory with the mainframe 3 Connect the cable C to the scanner 4 Attach the safety blocks D behind each hinge x 2 each NOTE These blocks prevent the ARDF from falling over if it is opened too far 40mm B815I118 WMF A B C D D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 119: ...PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 120: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 121: ...ecessary Platen Sheet Cover C I I I Dry cloth or alcohol Replace platen sheet if required Exposure Glass C C C Dry cloth or alcohol Toner Shield Glass C C C Optics cloth APS Sensor C C C Dry cloth or alcohol Exposure Glass Sheet through C C C Dry cloth or alcohol DRUM OPC AREA OPC Drum R R R Charge Roller R R R Charge Roller Cleaning Roller R R R Drum Cleaning Blade 1 R R R Drum Cleaning Blade 2 R...

Page 122: ...ol Registration Sensor C C C Blower brush Paper Feed Roller Gear L L L Silicone Grease G 501 See note below 1 Upper Relay Sensor C C C Blower Brush DUPLEX UNIT Upper Transport Roller C C C Water or alcohol Lower Transport Roller C C C Water or alcohol TRANSFER BELT UNIT Transfer Belt C R R R Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade R R R Dry cloth To prevent damage to the cleaning blade always replace these i...

Page 123: ... R R Fusing Thermistors R R R Cleaning Roller Bushings L L L Grease Barrierta S552R Hot Roller Strippers C R C Water or alcohol Paper Exit Guide Ribs C C C Water or alcohol See illustration below Exit Sensor C C C Blower brush DRIVE Drive Belts I Replace if necessary 1 Lubricate the paper feed clutch gear A with Silicone Grease G501 every P M B195P901 WMF B195P902 WMF Clean here A CÓPIA NÃO CONTRO...

Page 124: ...NOTE LCT Bottom Plate Pad C C C Dry or damp cloth B408 B545 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE 1000 SHEET TWO TRAY FINISHER Rollers C Water or alcohol Brush Roller A681 only I I I I Replace if required Discharge Brush C C C C Dry cloth Sensors C Blower brush Jogger Fences I I I I Replace if required Punch Waste Hopper I I I I Empty hopper Only for B545 B546 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE BOOKLET FINISHER Transport Be...

Page 125: ...REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 126: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 127: ...ure the LD drive board to the laser diode casing Doing so would throw the LD unit out of adjustment 2 Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit as they are adjusted in the factory 3 The polygon mirror and F theta lenses are very sensitive to dust Do not open the optical housing unit 4 Do not touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare hands 5 After replacing the LD...

Page 128: ... A2929500 Test Chart S5S 10 pc set 1 VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter FLUKE 187 1 A2309003 Adjustment Cam Laser Unit 1 A2309004 Positioning Pin Laser Unit 1 B6455010 SD Card 1 B6456800 USB Read Writer 1 G0219350 Loop Back Connector 1 3 2 2 LUBRICANTS Part Number Description Q ty A2579300 Grease Barrierta S552R 1 52039502 Silicone Grease G 501 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 129: ...DOOR SM 3 3 B291 B295 B296 B297 Replacement Adjustment 3 3 FRONT DOOR 1 Open front door 2 To remove the front door remove left pin A and right pin B B195R901 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 130: ...EX UNIT 1 Connector cover A x1 2 Duplex connectors B x2 3 Duplex support arm C x1 4 Duplex unit D NOTE Grip the duplex unit with both hands slowly rotate it towards you and then lift up B195R903 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 131: ... Adjustment 3 5 RIGHT UPPER COVER NOTE Work carefully to avoid damaging the development roller Duplex unit 3 4 Transfer belt unit 3 13 1 Remove the upper right cover A x1 Loop fastener x1 x1 Bushing x1 B195R904 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 132: ...ine If you wish to remove only the table or some of the components of this unit see 3 16 1 Duplex unit 3 4 2 Left cover A x1 3 Right cover B x1 4 Connectors C x2 5 By pass unit D x4 NOTE After removing the screws lift to unhook the by pass tray unit from the frame of the machine B195R902 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 133: ...B297 Replacement Adjustment 3 7 REAR COVERS 3 7 1 REAR UPPER COVER 1 Rear upper cover A x2 2 Controller cover B x2 3 7 2 REAR LOWER COVER 1 Rear lower cover A x4 B195R953 WMF B195R905 WMF A A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 134: ...LEFT COVER B291 B295 B296 B297 3 8 SM 3 8 LEFT COVER 1 Left upper cover A x4 2 Controller cover B x2 B195R955 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 135: ...t 3 9 SCANNER UNIT 3 9 1 ARDF 1 Interface connector not shown 2 ARDF A x2 Push the ARDF towards the front of the machine to align the keyholes in the ARDF base with the heads of the stud screws B and lift B195R906 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 136: ...he ARDF or platen cover 2 Rear scale A x3 3 Left scale B x2 4 Exposure glass C 5 DF exposure glass D NOTE When reinstalling the exposure glass make sure that the white dot is positioned at the rear left corner B195R907 WMF A B D C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 137: ...F 3 9 1 2 Exposure glass and DF exposure glass 3 9 2 3 Operation panel A x2 x1 4 Operation panel base B x4 5 Scanner rear cover C x4 Carefully lift in the direction of the arrow to disconnect the tab 6 Right cover D x3 7 Left cover E x2 B195R908 WMF B195R909 WMF A B C D E C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 138: ...Lens cover A x4 4 Flexible cable B x1 5 Lens block assembly C x4 NOTE The elements of the lens block assembly have been factory adjusted and paint locked at 8 points Do not attempt to replace these items Replace the unit 6 Perform scanner and printer copy adjustments 3 21 B195R910 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 139: ...t Adjustment 3 9 5 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS 1 ARDF 3 9 1 2 Exposure glass 3 9 2 3 Lens block 3 9 4 4 Original size sensors A x1 x2 5 Original size sensors B x1 x2 6 Original size sensor C x1 x1 B195R911A WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 140: ...1st scanner B to the cutout to expose connector and screw 5 Exposure lamp C x1 x1 Important Never touch the glass surface of the exposure lamp with bare hands Slide the exposure lamp toward the rear to disengage the tab on its base from the hole below and then lift out B195R912 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 141: ...ement Adjustment 3 9 7 SCANNER HP SENSOR PLATEN COVER SENSOR 1 ARDF 3 9 1 2 Scanner rear cover 3 9 3 3 Scanner HP sensor bracket A x1 4 Scanner HP sensor B x1 5 Platen cover sensor C x1 x1 B195R913 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 142: ... 3 Rear bracket A x5 x2 4 Scanner motor bracket B x3 x1 spring x1 timing belt x1 NOTE Loosen motor bracket B x3 to release tension on belt motor slides side to side 5 Scanner motor C x2 x1 6 Perform scanner and printer copy adjustments 3 21 B195R914 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 143: ...justment 3 9 9 LAMP STABILIZER AND SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE BOARD 1 ARDF 3 9 1 2 Scanner rear cover 3 9 3 3 Rear bracket A x5 x2 4 Lamp stabilizer B x2 Standoffs x3 5 Scanner motor drive board C x2 x2 B195R915 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 144: ...1 2 Exposure glass 3 9 2 3 Scanner exterior panels and operation panel 3 9 3 Front wire 4 Left stay A x5 5 Right stay B x5 6 Front stay C x6 7 Front scanner rail D x2 8 To replace the scanner wire see page 3 20 B195R916 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 145: ...B296 B297 Replacement Adjustment Rear wire 1 Scanner HP sensor bracket A x1 2 Scanner motor 3 9 8 3 Rear bracket B x9 4 Rear scanner rail C x2 5 Scanner drive pulley D x1 B195R917 WMF C D B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 146: ...re 6 Pass the wire through the pulleys as shown in the illustration and then pass the bead end of the wire through the slot in the pulley 7 Turn the pulley until you see the red mark on the wire 2 turns and 6 turns see top illustration 8 Without allowing the wire to loosen tape the wire to the pulley 9 Pass the wire through 10 Complete threading the wire Tension spring Screw 11 Scanner wire bracke...

Page 147: ...ackets B x2 3 Tighten tension bracket C x1 4 Secure scanner wire pulley D Allen screw x1 1 Remove the positioning tools After sliding the scanner to the right and left several times set the positioning tools to check the scanner wire bracket and tension bracket again 2 Reassemble the scanner and do the scanner and printer copy adjustments 3 21 B195R921 WMF B C D A A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO ...

Page 148: ...y damage your eyes 3 10 1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS Two caution decals are located in the laser section as shown below See the next page for removal instructions B195R500 WMF CAUTION VORSICHT PS CATION CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM VORSICHT LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B WENNABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHLAUSSETZEN B195R922 WMF CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 149: ...holder handle A 3 Remove front door B Pins x2 4 Remove toner collection plate C x 5 Remove inner cover D x 2 x 1 6 While pressing in the top leaf on the left side remove the shield glass cover E The shield glass cover holds the shield glass firmly in place and prevents it from accidental removal When re attaching the shield glass cover the top leaf lies on top of the plastic form 7 Shield glass F ...

Page 150: ...eld plate A x 2 9 While holding the LD board securely disconnect the laser unit connector B x 6 Flat film cable x1 10 Hold the laser unit C by its casing slide it out of the machine x 2 B195R900 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 151: ... Adjustment 3 10 3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR 1 Laser unit 3 10 2 2 Laser unit cover A x4 2 hooks 3 Polygon mirror motor B x4 x1 4 After replacing the motor do the image adjustment 3 21 B195R923 WMF B195R928 WMF B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 152: ...LASER UNIT B291 B295 B296 B297 3 26 SM 3 10 4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR 1 Laser unit 3 10 2 2 Laser synchronization detector A x1 x1 B195R929 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 153: ...2 2 LD unit A x3 x1 NOTE To avoid damaging the LD board hold it securely when disconnecting the connectors Hold the laser unit casing 3 After replacing the LD board perform SP 2 109 to adjust the laser beam pitch described on the next page B195R513 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 154: ...5 Print the test pattern onto A3 11 x 17 paper using SP2 902 3 No 12 5 2 4 Test Pattern Printing SP2 902 6 On the test pattern write 144 the value of SP2 109 1 7 Change the value of SP2 109 1 and then print another test pattern repeating steps 2 to 6 Print about 5 patterns with different values for SP2 109 1 e g 48 96 192 240 8 Check these test patterns If the laser beam pitch is not correct the i...

Page 155: ...m pitch for 400 dpi adjust it for 600 dpi using the same procedure as for 400 dpi use the SP modes for 600 dpi Laser beam pitch for 600 dpi should be 24 48 more than for 400 dpi OK Adjustment Complete NG Adjustment Not Complete B195R552 WMF B195R553 WMF CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 156: ... catch loose toner 4 Loosen A x 1 5 Push B slightly to the left 6 Raise the release lever C 7 Hold the PCU at D and pull it out of the machine 8 Cover the OPC with a sheet of paper to protect it from light Reinstallation Open the right cover before you install the PCU in the machine Make sure that the PCU brackets are engaged with the rails before you slowly push the PCU into the machine B195R930 ...

Page 157: ... disconnect the spring C 5 On the right side of the PCU disconnect the spring D and attach it to hooks as shown To prevent breaking the weaker hook use a pair of needle nose pliers to disconnect the spring at then re attach to and Moving this spring retracts the movable drum cleaning blade so it does not touch the surface of the drum when the drum is re installed B195R932 WMF B195R934 WMF 1 2 3 1 ...

Page 158: ...ng from and re attach to CAUTION You must return re attach the spring to in order for the cleaning blade to operate correctly If you fail to re attach the spring to the movable cleaning blade will not contact the drum for cleaning but the machine will operate without generating an error However copies will gradually become dirty due to toner collecting on the drum 10 Re attach the spring on the le...

Page 159: ... position adjustment If the pick off pawl has marked the drum with a line the pick off pawl position can be adjusted using either method Changing the spur position Changing the pick off pawl assembly position CAUTION After re assembly make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re attached to the position 3 11 2 B195R933 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 160: ...er 5 Cleaning roller E NOTE Disengage the cleaning roller on the left to remove 6 After replacing the charge roller and cleaning roller check the value of SP2001 001 If it is not at the standard value 1500 V set SP2001 001 to 1500 V NOTE If this is not done the carrier will be attracted to the drum because the charge roller voltage will be too high CAUTION After re assembly make sure that the fron...

Page 161: ... installation Engage the left end of the cleaning blade first then make sure that both arms B and C are through the holes on the left and right side When you re attach the snap ring make sure that the head of the snap ring D is below the blade CAUTION After re assembly make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re attached to the position 3 11 2 B195R939 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO...

Page 162: ...e charge roller and cleaning roller 3 11 4 3 Remove the movable cleaning blade 3 11 5 4 Remove the stationary drum cleaning blade A x 2 CAUTION After re assembly make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re attached to the position 3 11 2 B195R940 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 163: ...7 ID SENSOR Remove Remove the PCU 3 11 1 Fusing unit 3 15 Development unit 3 12 1 1 Remove the PCU rail A x2 x1 2 Remove the ID sensor bracket B x1 x1 3 Remove the ID sensor C x1 4 Do SP3 001 2 to initialize the ID sensor B195R941 WMF B C A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 164: ...other metal objects 2 Loosen A x 1 3 Push B slightly to the left 4 Development unit C NOTE Pull slowly to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller 5 Set the development unit on the spread paper 6 If you are temporarily installing a used development unit for test purposes perform SP2 802 1 after installation For more see Section 5 Service Tables B195R942 WMF B195R943 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO C...

Page 165: ...FILTER 1 Development unit 3 12 1 2 Upper development cover A x2 3 Development filter B NOTE Make sure that the surface with the red mark is facing up 4 Make sure that the ground plate C is positioned correctly B195R944 WMF B195R945 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 166: ...3 12 3 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER 1 Development unit 3 12 1 2 Upper development cover 3 12 2 3 Development roller A x2 NOTE Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller B195R946 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 167: ...veloper roller NOTE Dispose of the used developer in accordance with local regulations Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller 5 Pour approximately 1 3 of the developer C evenly along the length of the development unit 6 Rotate the drive gear D to work the developer into the unit Repeat C and D until all toner is in the unit and level with the edges B195R947 WMF B195R9...

Page 168: ...ize the TD sensor and enter the developer lot number NOTE When performing this setting cover the toner entrance hole with a piece of paper This prevents used toner falling from the PCU into the development unit during the TD sensor initial setting and interfering with the Vref setting toner density reference voltage 12 After performing the TD sensor initial setting remove the sheet A from the deve...

Page 169: ...ttached to the casing with double sided tape Pry it off with the flat head of a screwdriver Use fresh double sided tape to re attach the sensor 4 Pour new developer into the development unit and perform the TD sensor initial setting using SP2 801 NOTE When performing the TD sensor initial setting cover the toner entrance hole with a piece of paper B195R950 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONT...

Page 170: ...ong light cover it with paper if the right cover will be open for a long period 1 Lower the by pass tray open the duplex unit and open the right cover 2 Transfer unit A Hook x1 3 Transfer belt B springs x2 Hook x1 NOTE Avoid touching the transfer belt surface B195R951 WMF B195R952 WMF B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 171: ...touching the transfer belt surface 2 Before installing the new transfer belt clean all the rollers and shafts with alcohol to prevent the belt from slipping 3 When reinstalling the transfer belt make sure that the belt is under the pin E 4 To avoid damaging the transfer belt during installation manually turn the rollers and make sure that the new transfer belt is not running over the edges of any ...

Page 172: ...ching the edge of the new blade Check the new blade for dust or damage Toner Overflow Sensor 1 Transfer belt unit 3 13 1 2 Transfer belt 3 13 2 3 Transfer belt cleaning blade A x3 4 Turn over the transfer unit and empty the used toner in the transfer unit 5 Toner overflow sensor B x1 x3 NOTE Re install the color coded wires in the correct order R Red Br Brown Bl Blue B195R523 WMF R Br Bl A B CÓPIA...

Page 173: ...B296 B297 Replacement Adjustment 3 14 PAPER FEED 3 14 1 PICK UP SEPARATION AND FEED ROLLERS 1 Paper tray 2 Pick up roller A 3 Feed roller B x 1 4 Separation roller C x 1 B195R956 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 174: ...x unit 3 4 2 By pass tray 3 6 3 LCT if installed 4 Lower right cover A x5 5 Vertical transport cover B NOTE Push the cover completely to the left and then press in on the right tab to release the peg from the hole B195R957 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 175: ...ower cover 3 7 2 2 Remove the IOB 3 19 3 3 First paper feed clutch bracket A x2 bushing x1 4 Second paper feed clutch bracket B x2 bushing x1 5 Drive bracket C x1 spring x1 bearing x1 6 Relay clutch D x1 7 Upper paper feed clutch E x1 8 Lower paper feed clutch F x1 B195R958 WMF A B C D E F CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 176: ...ER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 1 1 Upper paper tray 2 Right lower cover 3 14 2 3 Right upper cover 3 5 4 Upper paper feed clutch A 3 14 3 5 3 relay gears B 6 Upper paper feed unit C x2 x1 B195R959 WMF B195R960 WMF A B B B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 177: ...PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 2 1 Lower the paper trays 2 Right lower cover 3 14 2 3 Remove the lower paper feed clutch A 3 14 3 4 Relay gears B x2 5 Cover C x2 6 Gear D x1 7 Lower paper feed unit E x2 x1 B195R961 WMF B195R962 WMF A B C D E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 178: ...R END PAPER HEIGHT RELAY SENSORS 1 Remove the appropriate paper feed unit 3 14 4 3 14 5 2 Paper height sensor A x1 3 Paper end sensor B x1 4 Relay sensor bracket C x1 x1 5 Relay sensor D x1 B195R963 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 179: ... A x2 4 Front registration holder B x1 5 Front registration roller gear C x1 6 Registration roller bushing D spring x 1 7 High voltage power supply board E x3 x6 8 Flywheel F x3 9 Cover G x1 x2 10 Right rear cover H x3 11 Right cover switch bracket I x1 12 Rear registration holder J x1 13 Registration roller bushing K x1 spring x1 B195R998 WMF B195R981A WMF B195R982 WMF A B C D I J K E F G H CÓPIA...

Page 180: ...3 54 SM 14 Guide plate A and registration roller B spring x1 x 1 15 Registration guide plate C x2 x1 16 Sensor bracket D x1 17 Registration sensor E x1 x1 B195R983 WMF B195R984 WMF A B C D E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 181: ...55 B291 B295 B296 B297 Replacement Adjustment 3 14 8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1 Rear lower cover 3 7 2 2 Remove the IOB 3 19 3 3 Bracket A x2 x1 4 Tray lift motor B x2 B195R964 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 182: ...T MOTOR 1 Rear lower cover x4 3 7 2 2 Rear upper cover x4 3 7 1 3 Tray lift motor 3 14 8 4 Support A x2 harnesses x2 5 Timing belt B Raise arm to release tension on belt 6 Feed development motor C x3 x2 B195R985 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 183: ... 14 10 IDLE ROLLER DUST BLADE 1 Open the duplex unit and right door 2 Detach the dust blade A 3 Spread some paper on a flat surface and tap the dust blade gently to remove paper dust collected in its dust box B195R986 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 184: ...en the duplex unit and open the right door 2 Remove the PCU 3 11 1 3 Remove the development unit A 4 Press the top of the blade B to unlock it and open it to the left 5 Remove the dust blade C from the machine B195R987 WMF B195R988 WMF B C A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 185: ...ing the following procedure 3 15 1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL 1 Open the front door duplex unit and right door 2 Set screw A x 1 3 Fusing unit release lever B 4 Slide out the fusing unit C NOTE The larger knob D is provided to make turning the hot roller easier to free jams B195R989A WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 186: ... B297 3 60 SM 3 15 2 FUSING UNIT EXIT GUIDE 1 Fusing unit 3 15 2 Exit guide A Press the guide to the left and then press on the right end to release the peg from the hole B195R990A WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 187: ...djustment 3 15 3 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS 1 Fusing unit 3 15 2 Fusing unit cover A x4 NOTE Note the positioning of the step screws x2 and the set screws x2 3 Hot roller strippers B x7 and springs x7 B195R991A WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 188: ...S 1 Fusing unit 3 15 2 Fusing unit cover 3 15 3 3 Fusing entrance guide A x4 4 Lower cover B x1 Left side 5 Two terminals C x2 6 Center fusing lamp lead D Clamps x4 7 Bracket E x1 B195R992A WMF B195R993A WMF A B C D E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 189: ...oid breaking the fusing lamps handle them with care Avoid touching the lamps with bare hands Note the top bottom positioning of the fusing lamps as you remove them The sizes of the holes in the holder match the sizes of the ends of the 650 W lamp red and 650 W lamp brown 5 Remove both fusing lamps B195R994A WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 190: ... Center thermistor A x1 x1 holder x1 4 End thermistor B x1 x1 holder x1 CAUTION The thermistors are thinly coated and extremely fragile Handle with care to avoid damaging them They should be replaced every 150K 5 Center thermostat C x2 6 End thermostat D x2 B195R995A WMF B195R996A WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 191: ...Adjustment 3 15 6 HOT ROLLER PRESSURE ROLLER 1 Fusing unit 3 15 2 Fusing upper and lower cover 3 15 3 3 Fusing lamps 3 15 4 4 Springs x2 A both sides 5 Arms x2 B both sides 6 Pawl bracket C x4 B195R997A WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 192: ...ing the new hot roller peel off 3 cm 1 inch from both ends of the protective sheet on the new roller 2 Never touch the surface of the rollers 3 Work carefully to avoid damaging the surface of the hot roller 4 The standard pressure roller spring position is the upper position 5 When reinstalling the hot roller assembly and pressure roller assembly make sure that the flange position of the bushings ...

Page 193: ...ment Adjustment 3 16 BY PASS TRAY 3 16 1 COVER REPLACEMENT 1 Rear cover A x1 2 Front cover B x1 3 Hinge cover C x1 4 Upper cover D x2 5 Close the duplex unit and pull out the upper cover B195R976 WMF B D A C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 194: ...1 Upper cover 3 16 1 2 Lift up paper end feeler A to lock feeler in position NOTE Before reinstalling the upper cover return the paper end feeler to its original position 3 Replace the paper feed roller B x1 4 Replace the pick up roller C B195R977 WMF C B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 195: ... 3 69 B291 B295 B296 B297 Replacement Adjustment 3 16 3 BY PASS SEPARATION ROLLER 1 Close the by pass table 2 Remove the separation roller A from the bottom x1 B195R978 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 196: ...NOID 1 Upper cover 3 16 1 2 Lift paper end feeler A NOTE Before reinstalling the upper cover return the paper end feeler to its original position 3 Replace the paper end sensor B x1 4 Pick up solenoid C x1 x1 spring x1 B195R979 WMF C B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 197: ...ustment 3 16 5 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD REPLACEMENT 1 Hook A 2 Paper tray B x1 3 Size sensor board C NOTE To avoid breaking the hook of the paper size sensor board handle it carefully during removal B195R980 WMF C B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 198: ...re by pass tray unit can be removed not just the table 3 6 1 Hinge cover 3 16 1 2 Harness A x1 3 Screws B x2 4 By pass table C CAUTION To relieve pressure on the spring during removal depress it as shown in the illustration B195R801 WMF A C B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 199: ... Replacement Adjustment 3 16 7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT 1 By pass tray 3 16 1 2 Paper feed unit A x2 x2 3 Rear bracket B x4 x1 bushing x1 4 Paper feed clutch C x1 B195R802 WMF B195R803 WMF A C B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 200: ...DUPLEX UNIT B291 B295 B296 B297 3 74 SM 3 17 DUPLEX UNIT 3 17 1 DUPLEX COVER REMOVAL 1 Duplex unit cover A x4 B195R804 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 201: ... 75 B291 B295 B296 B297 Replacement Adjustment 3 17 2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Duplex unit cover 3 17 1 2 Sensor holder A x1 3 Entrance sensor B x1 B195R805 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 202: ...DUPLEX UNIT B291 B295 B296 B297 3 76 SM 3 17 3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Duplex unit 3 4 2 Sensor bracket A x1 3 Exit sensor B x1 G065R103 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 203: ...CH 1 Rear upper cover x2 3 7 1 2 High voltage supply board A x6 x3 NOTE Make sure that you re connect the wires in the correct order They are labeled 1 2 B C 3 Flywheels B x3 4 Registration clutch C x1 x1 5 Transfer belt contact clutch D x2 x2 B195R807 WMF B195R808 WMF B195R809 WMF A C D B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 204: ... 18 2 MAIN MOTOR Remove Rear upper cover 3 7 1 High voltage power supply flywheel 3 18 1 1 Remove the main cooling fan A x2 2 Timing belt B x1 3 Bracket C x3 4 Main motor D x2 x3 B195R924 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 205: ...OR Rear upper cover 3 7 1 Fusing unit cover 3 15 3 Do not disconnect Paper output tray A Harness clamps x3 B Connector bracket x1 x1 C Main fan x1 x1 D Motor bracket x4 x2 E Fusing exit motor x4 B195R925 WMF B195R926 WMF B195R927 WMF A B C D E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 206: ... holder handle A 3 Push the holder lever B to the right 4 Stopper C 5 Toner bottle holder and bottle D 6 Motor harness E clamps x 2 7 Toner supply motor F hooks x2 x1 NOTE Press both sides of the motor to release it B195R810 WMF B195R813 WMF B C E F A D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 207: ... NVRAM to avoid damaging other components on the controller board or short circuiting the pins of other chips 1 Do SP5990 001 to print the SMC report 2 Turn off the main switch 3 Remove the controller cover x2 3 7 1 4 Remove the SD card slot cover A x1 5 Insert the SD card B into SD card slot C3 6 Turn on the main switch 7 Do SP5824 8 Touch Execute to start uploading the NVRAM data 9 Turn off the ...

Page 208: ...achine 15 Do SP5825 16 Touch Execute to start downloading the NVRAM data 17 Turn off the main switch and remove the SD card 18 Turn on the machine 19 Do SP5990 001 to print another SMC report 20 Compare this new SMC report with the report you printed in Step 1 If any of the SP settings are different enter the SP settings of the first report 21 Execute SP5907 and enter the brand and model name of t...

Page 209: ...CUIT BOARDS SM 3 83 B291 B295 B296 B297 Replacement Adjustment 3 19 2 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 1 Rear upper cover 3 7 1 2 High voltage power supply A x3 x6 B195R820 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 210: ... 2 Remove the IOB B All x 4 Ribbon cable x 1 3 The IOB is identical for the B291 B295 B296 B297 However the DIP switches are set differently for each machine Check the DIP switches then adjust settings as required See next page B195R821 WMF B195R822 WMF B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 211: ...and 5 should all be DOWN OFF Do not change these settings This information is only for reference SW If set to ON 2 Switches off jam detection 3 Engine program recovery 4 Print output for debugging 5 Switches off SC detection 3 SW 6 7 8 should be set for the area where the machine is used and serviced 6 7 8 Location OFF OFF OFF Japan ON OFF OFF North America OFF ON OFF Europe ON OFF ON Taiwan ON ON...

Page 212: ...OARDS B291 B295 B296 B297 3 86 SM 3 19 4 BICU BOARD 1 Controller box A x5 2 IPU shield plate B x2 3 BICU cover C x3 4 BICU D x2 B770I103A WMF B815I110 WMF B195R823A WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 213: ...INTED CIRCUIT BOARDS SM 3 87 B291 B295 B296 B297 Replacement Adjustment 3 19 5 PSU 1 Left cover 3 8 2 Ground earth plates A x2 3 PSU B x4 x all B195R824A WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 214: ...led in a B291 B296 copier The controller board for the B295 B297 45 cpm must be installed in a B295 B297 copier 1 Remove the controller cover x 2 3 7 1 2 Controller board faceplate A x 2 3 Controller board B x 4 4 HDD unit bracket C x 3 x 2 5 After replacing the HDD execute SP 5853 to copy the stamp data from the firmware ROM to the new disk B195R825 WMF B195R826 WMF C A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓP...

Page 215: ...r the following procedures 3 After completing these printing adjustments be sure to set SP 2 902 3 to 0 again Registration Leading Edge Side to Side 1 Check the leading edge registration and adjust it using SP1 001 Specification 3 2mm 2 Check side to side registration for each paper feed station and adjust with the following SP modes SP mode Specification 1st paper feed SP1 002 1 2nd paper feed SP...

Page 216: ...m Leading edge SP2 101 1 3 2 mm Left edge SP2 101 3 2 1 5 mm Trailing edge duplex copy 2nd side SP2 101 5 1 2 2 mm Right edge duplex copy 2nd side SP2 101 6 0 3 1 5 mm Left edge duplex copy 2nd side SP2 101 7 0 3 2 5 1 5 mm Main Scan Magnification 1 Use SP2 902 3 5 Grid Pattern to print a single dot pattern 2 Check magnification and then SP2 909 1 Main Scan Magnification Copy to adjust magnificati...

Page 217: ...ears If the parallelogram pattern appears perform the following procedure 1 Laser unit A 2 Bracket B x2 3 Install adjustment cam C P N A2309003 4 Secure positioning pin D P N A2309004 with the two screws removed with the bracket B Do not tighten the screws at this time 5 To adjust the position of the laser unit E 1 Adjust the laser unit position by turning the adjustment cam See the illustration a...

Page 218: ... the leading edge and side to side registration and adjust them with the following SP modes if necessary SP mode Leading Edge SP4 010 Side to side SP4 011 Magnification Use an OS A3 test chart to perform the following adjustment Sub Scan Magnification 1 Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the magnification ratio Use SP4 008 Scanner Sub S...

Page 219: ...3 Check the registration and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range SP6 006 1 Side to Side Registration 3 0 mm SP6 006 2 Leading Edge Registration Simplex 3 0 mm SP6 006 3 Leading Edge Registration Duplex Front 4 2 mm SP6 006 4 Leading Edge Registration Duplex Back 4 2 mm SP6 006 5 Rear Edge Erase 2 0 mm B195R9834 WMF B A B195R9826 WMF A Leading edge...

Page 220: ...iagnostics menu 2 On the touch screen press Touch Screen Adjust or press 3 Use a pointed not sharp tool to press the upper left mark 4 Press the lower right mark after it appears 5 Touch a few spots on the touch panel to confirm that the marker appears exactly where the screen is touched If the mark does not appear where the screen is touched press Cancel and repeat from Step 2 6 When you are fini...

Page 221: ...TROUBLESHOOTING CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 222: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 223: ...ff and on When a Level D SC code occurs When a Level D SC occurs a screen opens on the operation panel to tell the operator An error occurred The job in progress will be erased The machine will reboot automatically after approximately 30 seconds The operator can wait until the machine reboots automatically or touch Reset on the screen to reset the machine immediately and go back to the copy screen...

Page 224: ...this occurs check the SC number after leaving the SP mode The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues a Level D SC code This is done for Level D SC codes only CAUTION Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory press the operation switch to switch the power off wait for the power LED to go off and then switch th...

Page 225: ...ition error 2 121 D The scanner home position sensor does not detect the off condition during initialization or copying SIB or scanner motor drive board defective Scanner motor defective Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor disconnected Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor power source disconnected Scanner HP sensor defective Harness between SIB and scanner HP sensor disconnected Sca...

Page 226: ...aper reaches the registration sensor BICU board defective PCI harness between the controller board and the BICU defective or disconnected Synchronization error 322 D The synchronization signal was not issued within 500 ms after the LD fired while the polygon motor was turning at the prescribed number of revolutions Laser synchronization board connectors loose disconnected or damaged Laser synchron...

Page 227: ...cted or damaged Polygon motor drive board defective Polygon motor defective Polygonal Mirror Motor Error 4 Unstable Timeout 338 D The XSCRDY signal is detected LOW Active after the polygonal mirror motor switches on but the signal is not detected LOW after 1 s has elapsed and not detected after another 500 ms has elapsed I F harness of the polygonal mirror motor disconnected or defective Polygonal...

Page 228: ... at the start of Vsg checking after 20 seconds ID sensor defective ID sensor harness defective ID sensor connector defective I O board IOB defective Exposure system defective Poor ID sensor connector connection High voltage supply board defective Dirty ID sensor TD sensor error Test value abnormal 390 D The TD sensor output voltage is less than 0 5V or more than 5 0V after 10 consecutive times dur...

Page 229: ...ve Poor transfer belt position sensor connection Transfer belt contact clutch defective Main motor lock 440 D The PLL lock signal remained HIGH while the main motor was off and when the motor was turned on the signal remained LOW for 2 sec Physical overload on drive mechanism Main motor drive board PCB defective Feed Development Motor Error 450 D The PLL lock signal remained HIGH while the feed de...

Page 230: ...y and motor Pick up arm malfunction 3rd tray lift malfunction optional paper tray unit The paper height sensor is not activated after the tray lift motor has been on for 13 seconds If the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at the feed height the paper height position is detected again At this time the paper height sensor should de activate within 5 seconds after the paper bot...

Page 231: ...r was off and when the motor was turned on the signal remained LOW for 2 sec Motor lock caused by physical overload Motor drive board PCB defective Fusing thermistor open 541 A The fusing temperature detected by the thermistor was below 7 C 44 6o F for 5 seconds or 2 seconds after reaching 45o C 113o F the temperature does not reach an additional 15o C 59o F after checking five times at 0 1 interv...

Page 232: ...ror 548 A The machine cannot detect the fusing unit when the front cover and right cover are closed Fusing unit is not installed Fusing unit connection loose Zero cross frequency over 557 C The applied power ac frequency was detected less than 66 Hz more than 10 times or less than 44 Hz one time Nose on the ac power line Fusing unit jam 559 A The fusing exit sensor detected a fusing unit paper lat...

Page 233: ...e Abnormal operation performed by software Communication timeout error between BICU and finisher or mailbox 620 D The BICU cannot receive a response within 100 ms after 3 attempts after sending data to the finisher or mailbox Serial line connecting BICU and finisher unstable External noise BICU board and finisher main board connection defective or loose Finisher main board defective BICU board def...

Page 234: ...1 632 B After 1 data frame is sent to the device an ACK signal is not received within 100 ms and is not received after 3 retries The serial line from the device to the copier is unstable disconnected or defective Key card counter device error 2 633 B During communication with the device the BCU received a break Low signal The serial line from the device to the copier is unstable disconnected or de...

Page 235: ...pick up HP sensor does not activate three times consecutively after the pick up motor has turned on Original pick up HP sensor defective Pick up motor defective ADF main board defective Finisher jogger motor error 722 B The finisher jogger HP sensor does not return to the home position or move out of the home position within the specified time Jogger HP sensor defective Jogger motor defective Fini...

Page 236: ...uide open close motor is turned on the open close sensor does not activate within the specified time Finisher exit guide open close motor defective Open close sensor defective Finisher upper tray shift motor error 732 D The upper tray shift motor does not stop within the specified time Upper tray shift motor defective or overloaded Upper tray shift sensor defective Finisher lower tray lift motor e...

Page 237: ...F Finisher operating normally 2 s ON 1 s OFF START Example 1 4 2 The numbers refer to the flashes and intervals in the illustration above 1 300ms ON 500ms OFF 4 300ms ON 200ms OFF Repeats 3 times 300ms ON 500ms OFF break 2 300 ms ON 200ms OFF 300 ms ON 500ms OFF break Returns to START and repeats 2 s ON 1 s OFF then 1 4 2 2sec 1sec ON 300ms OFF 200ms START 1 4 2 Repeat Break 500ms Break 500ms Brea...

Page 238: ... Upper exit plate movement The guide plate motor sensor does not send the clock signal to the finisher board for certain period while the exit motor is on Guide plate motor defective Upper exit guide 2 switch defective Upper exit guide sensor defective Shift tray safety switch defective 1 4 1 After the jogger motor turns on to move the jogger fence from its home position the jogger HP sensor does ...

Page 239: ...e 1 9 1 Back up RAM The check sum is abnormal when the main switch is turned on Finisher board defective 1 10 1 Communication error between finisher board and copier mainframe 1 10 2 Communication Communication error between finisher board and booklet unit board Finisher board defective Booklet unit board defective Poor connection of the interface harness 1 11 1 After the positioning plate motor t...

Page 240: ... turn off within 0 5s after the rear stapler motor turns on 1 16 2 Rear stapler motor The rear staple hammer HP switch does not turn on within 0 5s after the rear stapler motor turns on during jam recovery Rear stapler motor defective Rear staple hammer HP switch defective 1 17 1 After the folder plate motor turns on to return the folder plate to its home position the folder plate HP sensor does n...

Page 241: ...oes not turn on within 1s after a copy job or warm up idling begins 1 19 2 When the booklet entrance guide sensor lower door sensor and booklet exit cover sensor are all activated doors closed the lower door safety switch does not turn on within 1s after a copy job or warm up idling begins 1 19 3 Switch When the booklet entrance guide sensor lower door sensor and booklet exit cover sensor are all ...

Page 242: ... The error code is not displayed on the operation panel Self Diagnostic Error CPU 820 D The central processing unit returned an error during the self diagnostic test Controller board defective Software defective Self diagnostic error 2 ASIC 821 D The ASIC provides the central point for the control of bus arbitration for CPU access for option bus and SDRAM access for SDRAM refresh and for managemen...

Page 243: ...lf diagnostic test Update controller firmware again Replace RAM DIMM Self diagnostic error 7 ROM 828 D Measuring the CRC for the boot monitor and operating system program results in an error A check of the CRC value for ROMFS of the entire ROM area results in an error Software defective Controller board defective ROM defective NOTE For more details about this SC 833 SC834 error execute SP5990 to p...

Page 244: ...ng machine operation the machine can get access to the board that holds the wireless LAN but not to the wireless LAN card 802 11b or Bluetooth Wireless LAN card missing was removed Wireless LAN error 3 855 B An error was detected on the wireless LAN card 802 11b or Bluetooth Wireless LAN card defective Wireless LAN card connection incorrect Wireless LAN error 4 856 B An error was detected on the w...

Page 245: ... HDD cannot respond to an CRC error query Data transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the HDD HDD defective HDD access error 865 D HDD responded to an error during operation for a condition other than those for SC863 864 HDD defective SD card error 1 Confirmation 866 B The machine detects an electronic license error in the application on the SD card in the controller slo...

Page 246: ...g User Information Replace the HDDs Boot the machine from the SD card HDD mail receive data error 872 B The machine detected that the HDD was not operating correctly at power on The machine detected that the HDD was not operating correctly could neither read nor write while processing incoming email HDD defective Machine was turned off while the HDD was being accessed Do SP5832 007 to format the m...

Page 247: ...re NVRAM defective HDD defective File Format Converter MLB error 880 B A request to get access to the MLB was not answered within the specified time MLB defective replace the MLB Electrical total counter error 900 D The total counter contains something that is not a number NVRAM incorrect type NVRAM defective NVRAM data scrambled Unexpected error from external source SC901 Mechanical total count e...

Page 248: ...tions cannot be used HDD status codes are displayed below the SC code Refer to the four procedures below Recovery from SC 925 Here is a list of HDD status codes Display Meaning 1 HDD not connected 2 HDD not ready 3 No label 4 Partition type incorrect 5 Error returned during label read or check 6 Error returned during label read or check 7 filesystem repair failed 8 filesystem mount failed 9 Drive ...

Page 249: ... history will be erased Documents on the document server and scanned documents will not be erased The first time that the network gets access to the machine the management information must be configured again this will use a lot of time Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5832 011 do these steps 1 Go into the User Tools mode and do Delivery Settings to print all received fax documen...

Page 250: ...ot respond with the scanner setting signal required to start scanning processing Software defective Printer setting error 954 D The IPU does not respond with the settings that are required to start image processing by the printer Software defective Memory setting error 955 D The IPU does not respond with the settings that are required to start image processing using the memory Software defective C...

Page 251: ...Continued use of the machine with one or more of the SP codes listed above out of range could lead to toner overflow or other problems that could cause damage to the machine 1 Enter the SP mode and check the setting of SP2802 001 002 003 2 If these SP codes are within range turn the machine power off and on or If one or more of these SP codes is out of range do SP2801 001 TD Sensor Initial Setting...

Page 252: ... The software performs an unexpected function However unlike SC990 recovery processing allows the program to continue Software defective re boot 1 1 In order to get more details about SC990 and SC991 1 Execute SP7403 or print an SMC Report SP5990 to read the history of the 10 most recent logged errors 2 If you press the zero key on the operation panel with the SP selection menu displayed you will ...

Page 253: ...r DIMM option necessary for the application is not installed or not installed correctly Program download error The download program print data language data from the IC card does not execute normally 999 D Board installed incorrectly BICU defective IC card defective NVRAM defective Loss of power during downloading Important Notes About SC999 Primarily intended for operating in the download mode lo...

Page 254: ... indicator blinks even if there is toner in the development unit Toner Density TD S7 222 5 IOB Shorted SC390 01 is displayed Open The Paper Jam indicator will light whenever a copy is made Paper Exit S8 202 B2 IOB Shorted The Paper Jam indicator lights even if there is no paper Open The Paper Jam indicator lights even if there is no paper Registration S9 224 B2 IOB Shorted The Paper Jam indicator ...

Page 255: ...in the lower paper tray Lower Paper End S14 214 8 IOB Shorted The Paper End indicator does not light even if there is no paper in the lower paper tray Open The Paper Jam indicator will light whenever a copy is made Upper Relay S15 220 5 IOB Shorted The Paper Jam indicator lights even if there is no paper Open The Paper Jam indicator will light whenever a copy is made Lower Relay S16 214 5 IOB Shor...

Page 256: ...SU Shorted Doors Covers Open is not displayed even if the front cover is opened 4 3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS Rating Fuse 115V 210 230V Symptom at power on Power Supply Board FU1 6 3A 125V 6 3A 250V Doors Covers Open is displayed FU2 6 3A 125V 6 3A 250V Doors Covers Open for the finisher is displayed FU3 6 3A 125V 6 3A 250V Paper end condition FU5 6 3A 125V 6 3A 250V SC302 or SC403 or SC405 displayed ...

Page 257: ...Off Off Off Controller LED Sequences LED 1 Red LED 2 Red System Startup including Self Diagnostics On Off Self Diagnostic Error On On Normal Operation Flashes Off Firmware Update Normal Execution Flashes Flashes Firmware Update Error Off Off Firmware Update Normal End On On NOTE LED 1 monitors Data Bus Bit 14 LED 2 monitors Data Bus Bit 15 4 5 TEST POINTS Controller Board Number Monitored Signal T...

Page 258: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 259: ...SERVICE TABLES CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 260: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 261: ...n switch the main power switch off Service Mode Lock Unlock At locations where the machine contains sensitive data the customer engineer cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator 1 If you cannot go into the SP mode ask the Administrator to log in with t...

Page 262: ...nsitive data the customer engineer cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator 4 If you cannot go into the SP mode ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then set Service Mode Lock to OFF After he or she logs in User Tools System Settings ...

Page 263: ...on Buckle Adjustment 1003 Adjusts the relay clutch timing at registration Relay clutch timing determines the amount of paper buckle at registration A setting causes more buckling 1003 1 Trays 2 3 4 LCT 1003 2 Duplex 1003 3 Bypass 9 9 0 1 mm step 1003 4 Tray 1 Feed 9 9 1 1 mm step 1003 5 Bypass Thick Paper 9 9 2 1 mm step By pass Feed Paper Size Display 1007 Displays the paper width sensor data for...

Page 264: ...rature control method After changing this setting be sure the power the machine off and on again with the main power switch to enable the new setting 0 1 0 1 0 Normal ON OFF control Allows full application from ac power supply to bring the hot roller up to the target fusing temperature then shuts off Determines the on time from the present temperature detected by the thermistor on the hot roller a...

Page 265: ...sing temperature at the ends of the hot roller for bypass feed Re load Temp Minus Roller Center 0 60 30 1 step 1105 5 Sets the reload temperature for the center of the hot roller This setting depends on the target temperature Reload temp Target Temp This SP Setting Note Do not set a temperature that is higher than the setting for SP1105 1 Roller Center Trays Re load Temp Minus Roller Ends 0 60 10 ...

Page 266: ...Fusing Jam SC Setting This SP setting determines whether SC559 is issued after three paper late jams occur in the fusing unit After this SP code is turned on a counter monitors the number of paper late jams that occur in the fusing unit After the 3rd occurrence of a fusing jam SC559 is issued and the machine cannot be used until the service technician releases the error Note Switching the machine ...

Page 267: ...r voltage correction Charge Roller Voltage Adjustment 2 1000 2000 2000V 10V step 2005 4 Adjusts the upper limit value for charge roller voltage correction Charge Roller Voltage Step 0 100V 30V 10V step 2005 5 Adjusts the correction voltage adjustment step size Printing Erase Margin 2101 Adjusts the leading edge top trailing edge bottom left and right margins 2101 1 Leading Edge Top 0 9 9 0 3 0 1 m...

Page 268: ...es the laser beam pitch for 600 dpi using the value for SP2 109 2 After entering a value for SP2 109 2 this SP must be used Auto Pitch Adjustment Interval 0 65535 1000 1 step 2109 5 Sets the interval for automatic laser beam pitch adjustment When the number of times that the resolution has been changed reaches this value the laser unit position is automatically corrected Current LD Unit Position 2...

Page 269: ...upply Rate Toner Rate 10 800 60 mg s 5 mg s step 2209 1 Sets the amount of toner supplied every second by the toner supply motor The length of time the motor remains on is determined by the data read by the TD sensor and ID sensor Increasing this value reduces the toner supply clutch on time Use a lower value if the user tends to make lots of copies that have a high proportion of black Toner Suppl...

Page 270: ... 0 step 1 Check the value of SP2 220 in both the machine containing the test unit and the machine that you are going to move it to 2 Install the test development unit and then input the VREF for this unit into SP2 220 3 After the test put back the old development unit and change SP2 220 back to the original value Notes 2223 Vt Display Current 2223 1 Displays the TD sensor output voltage for the im...

Page 271: ...high humidity and high temperature conditions Bypass Feed 45ppm 45 CPM 20 100μA 45 1μA step 2301 4 Adjusts the transfer current for copying from the by pass tray image area for the 45 CPM 45 cpm If the user normally feeds thicker paper from the bypass tray use a higher setting Leading Edge Bypass Feed 45ppm 45 CPM 20 100μA 60 1μA step 2301 5 Adjusts the transfer current for copying at the leading ...

Page 272: ... delta 1 0 3 1 5 0 1 mm step 2309 6 Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient used if the paper width is less than the setting of SP2 309 2 TD Sensor Initial Setting 2801 Performs the TD sensor initial setting and allows the service technician to enter the lot number of the developer The lot number is embossed on the edge of the developer package This SP mode controls the voltage applied...

Page 273: ...n 2909 Adjusts the magnification in the main scan direction for copy mode and printer mode Press to toggle 2909 1 Copier 2 0 2 0 0 0 1 step 2909 2 Printer 2 0 2 0 0 0 1 step 2911 Transfer Current On Off Timing La On Timing 30 30 0 mm 1 mm step 2911 1 Adjusts the transfer current on timing at leading edge Lb Switch Timing 0 30 10 mm 1 mm step 2911 2 Adjusts the transfer current switch timing This d...

Page 274: ...the value of SP2 309 1 Use this SP when an image problem see 2 914 1 occurs when paper with a small width is fed from the by pass feed tray B delta 0 300 50 10V step 2914 4 Adjusts the development bias used when paper with a small width is fed from the by pass tray The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the value of SP2 309 2 Use this SP when an image problem see 2 914 1 occu...

Page 275: ...nge of halftones at the pale end of the scale If the image contains pale areas with fuzzy borders surrounded by dark areas reduce this value to make the borders clearer Lower Limit 0 100 57 1 step 35 cpm only 2972 2 Defines the lower limit for grayscale A smaller value allows a wider range of halftones at the dark end of the scale Grayscale Copy Interval Check 0 1000 100 10 step 2973 Sets the half...

Page 276: ...r end recovery Charge Counter 0 1000000 0 1 step 2980 Sets the number of pages to print after toner and carrier initialization before the charge input is increased to compensate for deterioration over time in the polarity of the carrier The strength in the polarity of the carrier in the toner will eventually decrease and cause lower charge output Setting the charge output to increase after a speci...

Page 277: ...After Job 3905 Toner and carbon clinging to the hot roller strippers can cause poor print quality To prevent this toner and carbon are dislodged from the hot roller strippers in two ways 1 switching the fusing motor on off after every print job and 2 freely rotating the hot roller for 5 s at the beginning of every print job These SP set up operation of the first method switching the fusing motor o...

Page 278: ...or will switch on for 15 sec switch off for 4 sec switch on for 15 sec and then switch off Switching the fusing motor on again for 15 sec after 45 sec have elapsed after the 1st Cleaning is called the 2nd Cleaning No of times for 3rd HR stripper cleaning 3905 5 This SP prescribes the number of times that the cleaning pattern of SP3905 004 is repeated for the number of pages prescribed by SP3905 00...

Page 279: ...anning Press to toggle 4 6 4 6 0 0 0 1 mm step As you enter negative values the image will disappear at the left and as you enter positive values the image will appear at the left Scanner Erase Margin 4012 Adjusts scanning margins for the leading and trailing edges sub scan and right and left edge main scan Do not adjust unless the customer desires a scanner margin greater than the printer margin ...

Page 280: ...on 0 8 4 1 If you see black streaks in copies when no warning has been issued raise the setting to increase the level of sensitivity If warnings are issued when you see not black streaks in copies lower the setting Note Dust that triggers a warning could be removed from the glass by the originals in the feed path If the dust is removed by passing originals this is not detected and the warning rema...

Page 281: ...can 4550 2 MTF Filter Level Sub Scan Set the MTF coefficient for main sub scan directions 0 15 8 1 0 Weakest Å 8 Default Æ 15 Strongest 4550 3 MTF Filter Strength Main Scan 4550 4 MTF Filter Strength Sub Scan Set the MTF strength for main sub scan directions 0 7 4 1 0 Weakest Å 4 Default Æ 7 Strongest 4550 5 Smoothing Filter Selects the level of smoothing for originals that contain dithered images...

Page 282: ...ongest 4551 5 Smoothing Filter Selects the level of smoothing 0 7 0 1 0 Default Off Æ 7 Strongest 4551 6 Brightness Sets the overall brightness of the image 1 255 128 1 1 Weakest Å 128 Default Æ 255 Strongest 4551 7 Contrast Sets the overall contrast of the image 1 255 128 1 1 Weakest Å 128 Default Æ 255 Strongest 4551 8 Isolated Dot Removal Sets the level of independent dot erasure to improve the...

Page 283: ...lt Æ 7 Strongest 4552 5 Smoothing Filter Selects the level of smoothing 0 7 0 1 0 Default Off Æ 7 Strongest 4552 6 Brightness Sets the overall brightness of the image 1 255 128 1 1 Weakest Å 128 Default Æ 255 Strongest 4552 7 Contrast Sets the overall contrast of the image 1 255 128 1 1 Weakest Å 128 Default Æ 255 Strongest 4552 8 Isolated Dot Removal Sets the level of independent dot erasure to i...

Page 284: ...est 4553 5 Smoothing Filter Selects the level of smoothing 0 7 0 1 0 Default Off Æ 7 Strongest 4553 6 Brightness Sets the overall brightness of the image 1 255 128 1 1 Weakest Å 128 Default Æ 255 Strongest 4553 7 Contrast Sets the overall contrast of the image 1 255 128 1 1 Weakest Å 128 Default Æ 255 Strongest 4553 8 Isolated Dot Removal Sets the level of independent dot erasure to improve the ap...

Page 285: ...7 Strongest 1 When the CCD converts the original image to electrical signals the contrast is reduced due to the influence that adjacent white and black pixels have on one another as a result of lens properties Typically you will see very narrow width and spacing between black and white areas MTF corrects this problem and emphasizes image detail SBU Version 4600 This SP displays the ID code of the ...

Page 286: ... 4624 3 EVEN 4624 4 ODD Detail adjustment this time 0 255 200 1 Gain Adjustment Current 4629 When the machine is turned on the SBU performs separate fine adjustments for Ech the even channel and Och the odd channel These SP codes read the values of adjustments done after the machine was powered on These SP codes should display 223 1 set by the white level peak adjustment as the fine gain adjustmen...

Page 287: ...ansmission error has occurred at LM98513 0 OxFF 0 1 The position of the bits that display 1 tell you where the error has occurred Bit No Where the Error Occurred Bit 0 LSB LM98513 Read Error Bit 1 GASBUP Read Error Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 MSB Reserved BK Adjustment Prev DFU 4655 These SP codes allow you to confirm the values for rough and detail adjustments of the black level even and ...

Page 288: ...chine is turned on the SBU performs separate fine adjustments for Ech the even channel and Och the odd channel These SP codes read the values of the adjustments in effect before the machine was powered on These SP codes should display 223 1 set by the white level peak adjustment as the fine gain adjustment and sent to the DAC You can use these SP codes to adjust the value manually Be sure to turn ...

Page 289: ...nducts pre filter processing for fax mode 3 Conducts fax Text mode OR processing for main scan for resolution below 100 dpi Pre filter processing is done in every mode except Fax Text mode 4903 10 to 4903 16 Pre Filter Processing 6 5 The following 5 SP modes Selects the filter processing setting for smoothing in order to reduce the incidence of moiré in images in different original modes Specifica...

Page 290: ...52 Text Photo Mode MTF Filter Coefficient 6 5 The following 8SP modes select the filter coefficients for either the edges Edge or for the entire image All for the Text Photo mode at various reproduction ratios Generally increasing the value can improve the appearance of low contrast text however it can also cause background to fade or drop out completely or increase the incidence of moiré Each SP ...

Page 291: ...Enter the appropriate number with the 10 key pad then press 4903 76 and 4903 77 Select the threshold for line width detection in originals copied in the Generation Copy mode Higher numbers make it easier to thicken thin lines 4903 75 Line Width Correction Generation Mode 0 None 1 Thin 2 Thin 3 Thick 4903 76 LWC Threshold Main Scan Generation Mode 0 5 1 1 step 4903 77 LWC Threshold Sub Scan Generat...

Page 292: ...xt Density 0 7 0 1 0 Off 1 Weaker 7 Stronger 4904 5 Enter the appropriate number with the 10 key pad then press This SP code adjusts the density of the image to eliminate vertical black lines in originals that were caused by previous scanning with a dirty optics While selecting a higher setting to erase more lines selecting a very high setting can cause low contrast areas to become faint or cause ...

Page 293: ... of sharp text 6 5 4904 25 to 4904 28 Text Photo General Quality 6 5 The following 4 SP modes allow adjustment with other SP codes to improve quality of images scanned in the Text Photo mode and in the specified magnification range Select a lower setting to prioritize reproduction of pictures without moiré and select a higher setting to prioritize reproduction of sharp text 0 Off 1 Pictures highes...

Page 294: ...ts the method for image quality through processing SP4909 20 Forces switching of the data output format between writing for the Ri10 CDIA for testing 4905 1 Image Quality Through Processing DFU 0 Normal operation 1 Grayscale through processing 2 Gamma correction through processing 3 Printer gamma grayscale through processing 4905 20 Image Data Path Printer DFU 0 Normal operation 1 Sets output from...

Page 295: ...ay IP Address 5055 Switches the banner display of the IP address off and on Default Off OFF ON For example if this SP is switched on the IP address will be displayed below Ready while the printer is in standby mode Ready 169 254 187 055 A3 DLT Double Count 5104 Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3 DLT Yes counts except from the bypass tray When Yes is selected A3 and DLT paper are count...

Page 296: ...evice 1 2 Expansion Device 2 3 Expansion Device 3 Disable Copying 5118 Temporarily denies access to the machine Japan Only 0 1 1 0 Release for normal operation 1 Prohibit access to machine 5120 Mode Clear Opt Counter Removal Do not change Japan Only 0 2 1 0 Yes Normal reset 1 Standby Resets before job start after completion 2 No Normally no reset Counter Up Timing 5121 Determines whether the optio...

Page 297: ...7 Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device This SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted for by an external accounting device 0 Automatic printing 1 No automatic printing 5169 CE Login If you will change the printer bit switches you must log in to service mode with this SP before you go into the printer SP mode 0 1 1 0 Off Printer bit switches cannot be adjust...

Page 298: ...nd 003 are done with 8 digit numbers Digits Meaning 1st 2nd Month 4 April 10 October for months 1 to 9 the first digit of 0 cannot be input so the eight digit setting for 002 or 003 becomes a seven digit setting 3rd Day of the week 0 Sunday 1 Monday 4th The number of the week for the day selected at the 3rd digit If 0 is selected for Sunday for example and the selected Sunday is the start of the 2...

Page 299: ...View 1 Edit 2 Edit Delete 3 Full control Note This SP setting is ignored on a machine that is not using document server 5401 200 SDK1 Unique ID 5401 201 SDK1 Certification Method 5401 210 SDK2 Unique ID 5401 211 SDK2 Certification Method 5401 220 SDK3 Unique ID 5401 221 SDK3 Certification Method SDK is the Software Development Kit This data can be converted from SAS VAS when installed or uninstall...

Page 300: ... the stapler installed in the finisher DFU 0 Off 1 On 0 No alarm 1 Alarm goes off for every 1K of staples used 5507 3 Toner Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On Switches the control call on off for the toner end DFU 0 Off 1 On If you select 1 the alarm will sound when the copier detects toner end 5507 128 Others 5507 132 Interval A3 5507 133 Interval A4 5507 134 Interval A5 5507 141 Interval B4 5507 142 Interv...

Page 301: ... number of continuous paper jams required to initiate a call 02 10 1 This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is enabled set to 1 5508 13 Door Open Time Length Sets the length of time the remains opens to determine when to initiate a call 03 30 1 This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is enabled set to 1 5508 21 Jam Operation Time Length Determines what happens when a paper jam is left u...

Page 302: ...es Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software 5801 11 NCS Initializes the system defaults and interface settings IP addresses also the SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings WebStatusMonitor settings and the TELNET settings NCS Network Control Service 5801 12 R Fax Deletes received faxes 5801 14 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS Delivery Control Service s...

Page 303: ...ive 5812 3 Supply Supplier of consumables 5812 4 Operation Operation support 5816 Remote Service I F Setting 5816 1 Turns the remote diagnostics off and on 0 2 1 0 Remote diagnostics off 1 Serial CSS or NRS remote diagnostics on 2 Network remote diagnostics CE Call 5816 2 Lets the customer engineer start or end the remote machine check with CSS or NRS to do this push the center report key Function...

Page 304: ...leted RCG C Registed Detail 5816 22 This SP displays the Cumin installation status 0 Basil not registered 1 Basil registered 2 Device registered Connect Type N M 5816 23 This SP displays and selects the Cumin connection method 0 Internet connection 1 Dial up connection Connect Timeout DFU 5816 27 Timeout time for connection to the GW URL Operates only for Cumin Default 30 Send Timeout DFU 5816 28 ...

Page 305: ... 31 characters characters beyond the 31st character are ignored Note The proxy number user name and password comprise proprietary customer information required by the service technician to do the necessary settings for Cumin N To prevent unauthorized access this information these SP settings do not appear in the SMC report CERT Up State Displays the state of the certification update used for Cumin...

Page 306: ...D Firm Up 5816 84 This setting determines if the firmware can be updated even without the HDD installed Firm Up User Check 5816 85 This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version of the firmware before the firmware update execution If the option to confirm the previous version is selected a notification is sent to the system manager and the firmware update is done with ...

Page 307: ...Execute 5816 203 Executes the inquiry request to the NRS GW URL Confirm Result Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816 203 0 Succeeded 1 Inquiry number error 2 Registration in progress 3 Proxy error proxy enabled 4 Proxy error proxy disabled 5 Proxy error Illegal user name or password 6 Communication error 7 Certification update error 8 Other error 5816 204 ...

Page 308: ...3 Basil not managed 2394 Device not managed 2395 Box ID for Basil is illegal 2396 Device ID for Basil is illegal 2397 Incorrect ID2 format 5816 208 Error Caused by Response from GW URL 2398 Incorrect request number format 5816 250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log 5821 Remote Service Address Japan Only 5821 1 CSS PI Device Code Sets the PI device code After changing this setting you must ...

Page 309: ...med at the next power on This SP operates only when SP5828065 is set to 1 1 Resumes printing spooled jog 0 Clears spooled job This SP determines whether job spooling is enabled or disabled for each protocol This is a 8 bit setting 0 LPR 4 BMLinks Japan Only 1 FTP Not Used 5 DIPRINT 2 IPP 6 Reserved Not Used 5828 69 Job Spool Protocol 3 SMB 7 Reserved Not Used 5828 84 Setting List Print Settings Li...

Page 310: ... with the POP server 0 1 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Operation Panel Image Exposure 0 Off disable 1 On enable 5834 Enables and disables the operation panel read dump feature After powering on the machine set this option to 1 to enable this feature To reset the machine to 0 the machine must be turned off and on again Selecting 0 for this option without cycling the power off and on does not restore the d...

Page 311: ...1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR DFU 5836 82 Format for Copy B W Text 0 3 1 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 5836 83 Format Copy B W Other 0 3 1 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 5836 84 Format for Printer Color 0 3 1 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR DFU 5836 85 Format for Printer B W 0 3 1 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 5836 86 Format for Printer B W HQ 0 3 ...

Page 312: ... Does not list the Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator Instead the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is used ON The Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator is used and the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is ignored Also when the serial bus is reset extra bus transactions are opened for the enumeration Logout 5839 11 Handles the login request of the login i...

Page 313: ...r login request while logging in the request is refused 01 10 11 2nd 3rd 4th keys are Reserved Supply Name Setting 5841 Press the User Tools key These names appear when the user presses the Inquiry button on the User Tools screen 5841 1 Toner Name Setting Black 5841 7 Org Stamp 5841 11 StapleStd1 5841 12 StapleStd2 Standard Staples for B698 5841 13 StapleStd3 Standard Staples for B700 B701 5841 14...

Page 314: ...itial system setting Retry Time 60 900 300 1 sec 5845 3 Sets the length of time to elapse before attempting to resend image files to the Scan Router Server after an error occurs Note This SP setting is ignored if SP5845 004 is set to 0 Retry Attempts 0 99 3 1 5845 4 Sets the number of attempts to resend image files to the Scan Router Server after an error occurs Note SP5845 003 sets the time to el...

Page 315: ...rectory The value is only displayed and cannot be changed This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI The ID is displayed as either 6 byle or 8 byte binary 6 byte 02X 02X 02X 02X 02X 02X 8 byte 02X 02X 02X 02X 02X 02X 02X 02X Machine ID Clear Delivery Server 5846 2 Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory Execute this SP if the connection of the d...

Page 316: ...ails the data is not erased from the SD card Fill Addr Acl Info 5846 41 This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine that previously had no HDD The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD installed the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD However the new address book on the HDD can be ac...

Page 317: ... LED stops flashing Search Option This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local address book Bit Meaning 0 Checks both upper lower case characters 1 2 3 Japan Only 4 Not Used 5 Not Used 6 Not Used 5846 60 7 Not Used Complexity Option 1 5846 62 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book Specifically this SP limits the passw...

Page 318: ...ord 0 32 1 Note This SP does not normally require adjustment This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book FTP Auth Port Settings 5846 91 Sets the FTP port to get the delivery server address book that is used in the individual authorization mode 0 65535 1 Encryption Start 5846 94 Shows the status of the encryption fu...

Page 319: ... externally by the Net File page reference function 0 2 1 5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by NetFile NetFile refers to jobs to be printed from the document server with a PC and the DeskTopBinder software 5847 2 Rate for Copy B W Text 0 6 1 5847 3 Rate for Copy B W Other 0 6 1 5847 5 Rate for Printer B W 0 6 1 5847 6 Rate for Printer B W HQ 0 6 1 0 1x 1 1 2...

Page 320: ... Directory Lower 4 Bits 5848 5 Acc Ctrl Delivery Input Lower 4 Bits 5848 7 Acc Ctrl Comm Log Fax Lower 4 Bits 5848 9 Acc Ctrl Job Control Lower 4 Bits 5848 11 Acc Ctrl Device Management Lower 4 Bits 5848 21 Acc Ctrl Delivery Lower 4 Bits 5848 22 Acc Ctrl User Administration Lower 4 Bits 5848 41 Acc Ctrl Security Setting Lower 4 Bits only Switches access control on and off 0000 OFF 0001 ON 5848 99 ...

Page 321: ...llation date of the machine 5849 1 Display The Counter Clear Day has been changed to Installation Date or Inst Date 5849 2 Switch to Print Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout for the total counter 0 1 1 0 No Print 1 Print 5850 Address Book Function Japan Only The machine is shipped ready to use with a G3 line Some addresses in the address book may be registered for ...

Page 322: ...Allowed 5857 Save Debug Log On Off 1 ON 0 OFF 001 Switches on the debug log feature The debug log cannot be captured until this feature is switched on 0 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON Target 2 HDD 3 SD Card 002 Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the event selected by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated 2 3 1 2 HDD 3 SD Card Save to HDD 005 Specifies the decimal key num...

Page 323: ...emory onto an SD card Copy SD to SD Latest 4MB Any Key 015 This SP copies the log on an SD card the file that contains the information written directly from shared memory to a log specified by key number Make HDD Debug 016 This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD Make SD Debug 017 This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card Debug Save When 5858 These SPs select the conte...

Page 324: ...ail with SP5860 006 set to 2 to enable encryption during SMTP certification for the SMTP server This can occur if the SMTP server does not meet RFC standards In such cases you can use this SP to set the SMTP certification method directly However this SP can be used only after SP5860 003 has been set to 1 On Bit0 LOGIN Bit1 PLAIN Bit2 CRAM_MD5 Bit3 DIGEST_MD5 Bit4 to Bit 7 Not Used 5866 Email Date ...

Page 325: ... when the machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error code If the same SC occurs again the machine does not reboot 5875 2 Reboot Type The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs Option Setup Data Overwrite Security DOS Setup 5878 Press Execute to initialize the Data Overwrite Security option for the copier For more see 1 18 Data Overwrite Security B735 in Section 1 Installation ROM Up...

Page 326: ...int Delay Timing 0 60 0 1 s 5959 Sets the amount of time the machine waits to project the latent image onto the drum after the feed development motor main motor and fusing feed out motor switch on This setting allows the drum and hot roller to turn freely in order to allow more time for cleaning toner and carbon that has accumulated on the hot roller strippers Changing this can improve image quali...

Page 327: ...ight version supplied with this machine 1 Full version optional 5985 Device Setting The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller Use this SP to enable and disable these features In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the controller board these SP codes must be set to 1 5985 1 On Board NIC 5985 2 On Board USB 0 Disable 1 Enable 5990 SP Print Mode SMC Printout 5990...

Page 328: ... of the ARDF for testing 5 2 6 ADF Free Run 6009 Performs a free run with the ARDF for duplex and stamp testing Input the number for the item you want to check and then press to start This is a general free run controlled from the copier For more detailed free run modes see the ARDF manual 6009 1 Duplex Mode OFF ON 6009 2 Stamp Mode OFF ON ADF Stamp Position Adjustment 7 7 0 0 5 mm steps 6010 Adju...

Page 329: ...ard the edge of the paper Punch Hole Adjustment 6113 Adjusts the punch hole position SP6113 1 2 hole punches for Japan North America Europe and 4 hole punches for Northern Europe SP6113 2 3 hole punches for North America and 4 hole punches for Europe Press to toggle A larger value shifts the holes toward the edge of the paper 6113 1 2 Holes 7 7 0 0 5 mm steps 6113 2 3 Holes 7 7 0 0 5 mm steps Fold...

Page 330: ...be useful for future product development 7401 Total SC Counter Displays the total number of service calls that have occurred Display range 0000 9999 7403 SC History 7403 1 Latest 7403 2 Latest 1 7403 3 Latest 2 7403 4 Latest 3 7403 5 Latest 4 7403 6 Latest 5 7403 7 Latest 6 7403 8 Latest 7 7403 9 Latest 8 7403 10 Latest 9 Displays the most recent service calls successive groups of 10 7502 Total Pa...

Page 331: ...nal Tray ON 13 Duplex Exit 2 ON 14 Duplex Exit 3 ON 16 Exit 1 Off 17 18 19 Ent Duplex 1 Off 23 Exit Duplex Off 24 25 Finisher Entrance 26 Finisher Proof Tray 27 Finisher Shift Tray 28 Finisher Stapler 29 Finisher Exit 30 Mailbox Entrance 31 Mailbox Proof Tray 32 Mailbox Relay 33 Mailbox MBX 35 Booklet FIN Entrance 36 Booklet FIN Transport 37 Booklet FIN Early 38 Booklet FIN Staple 39 Booklet FIN L...

Page 332: ...nual Name 1 At Power On 3 Registration Sensor Check In Failure Skew Correction Sensor 4 Nip in Sensor Check In Failure Interval Sensor 5 Registration Sensor On Check 6 Relay Sensor On Check 7 Inverter Sensor On Check 53 Registration Sensor Check Out Failure Skew Correction Sensor 54 Nip in Check Out Failure Interval Sensor 55 Registration Sensor Off Check 56 Relay Sensor Off Check 7505 57 Inverter...

Page 333: ...al Jam History 7508 Displays the original jam history of the transfer unit in groups of 10 starting with the most recent 10 jams Display contents are as follows CODE is the SP7 505 number SIZE is the paper size code in hex See Paper Size Hex Codes below TOTAL is the total jam error count SP7 003 DATE is the date the previous jam occurred 75081 Latest 75082 Latest 1 75083 Latest 2 75084 Latest 3 75...

Page 334: ...pen the Self Diagnose Result Display to view details about errors Use the keys on in the display on the touch panel to scroll through all the information If no errors have occurred you will see the No Error notation Pixel Coverage Ratio 7833 Displays the coverage ratio of the output the ratio of the total pixel area of the image data to the total printable area on the paper Note that this value is...

Page 335: ...Dust Check Counter Counts the occurrences Counting is done only if SP4999 1 ADF Scan Glass Dust Check is switched on 7852 2 Dust Check Clear Counter Clears the count Memory All Clear SP5801 resets this counter to zero 7901 Assert Info DFU These SP numbers display the results of the occurrence of the most recent SC code generated by the machine 7991 1 Source File Name Module name 7991 2 Line Number...

Page 336: ...ble make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean PREFIXES WHAT IT MEANS T Total Grand Total Grand total of the items counted for all applications C F P etc C Copy application F Fax application P Print application S Scan application Totals pages jobs etc executed for each application when the job was not stored on the document server L Local storage document server Totals jobs pages etc f...

Page 337: ...nCopy Generation Copy Mode GPC Get Print Counter For jobs 10 pages or less this counter does not count up For jobs larger than 10 pages this counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10 e g for an 11 page job the counter counts up 11 10 1 IFax Internet Fax ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI e g border removal adding stamps page numbers etc K Black YMCK LS Lo...

Page 338: ...ce Code Error SC code displayed Scn Scan Sim Simplex Simplex printing on 1 side S to Email Scan to E mail SMC SMC report printed with SP5990 All of the Group 8 counters are recorded in the SMC report Svr Server TonEnd Toner End TonSave Toner Save TXJob Send Transmission YMC Yellow Magenta Cyan YMCK Yellow Magenta Cyan Black NOTE All of the Group 8 service programs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory A...

Page 339: ...t server is not used A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F counter the fax destinations in the broadcast are not counted separately A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations If one transmission generates an error then the broadcast will not be counted until the transmission has been completed A printed fax report counts as one job for the F coun...

Page 340: ...al how files printed from the document server were stored on the document server originally 0 9999999 0 1 The L counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application the C counter increments When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored ...

Page 341: ...n over the telephone line or over a network attached to an e mail or as a fax image by I Fax 0 9999999 0 1 Note Jobs merged for sending are counted separately The L counter counts the number of jobs scanned from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel When a stored copy job is sent from the document server the C counter increments When images stored on the document server by ...

Page 342: ... 0 1 8066 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel The finishing method is specified from the print window within document server mode O FIN Jobs 0 9999999 0 1 8067 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application over the network The finishing method is specified by the application 806x 1 Sor...

Page 343: ...bs Web Image Monitor Palm 2 etc by size based on the number of pages in the job 807x 1 1 Page 807x 8 21 50 Pages 807x 2 2 Pages 807x 9 51 100 Pages 807x 3 3 Pages 807x 10 101 300 Pages 807x 4 4 Pages 807x 11 301 500 Pages 807x 5 5 Pages 807x 12 501 700 Pages 807x 6 6 10 Pages 807x 13 701 1000 Pages 807x 7 11 20 Pages 807x 14 1001 Pages For example When a copy job stored on the document server is p...

Page 344: ...nt is faxed to both a public fax line and an I Fax at a destination where both are available then this counter increments and the I Fax counter 812x also increments The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending not when the job is sent T IFAX TX Jobs 0 9999999 0 1 8121 These SPs count the total number of jobs color or black and white sent either directly or using a file stored on the ...

Page 345: ... PC or if one job is sent to more than one destination each send is counted separately For example if the same document is sent by Scan to Email as well as Scan to PC then it is counted twice once for Scan to Email and once for Scan to PC T Deliv Jobs Svr 0 9999999 0 1 8141 These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan Router server S Deliv Jobs Svr 8145 These SPs count the n...

Page 346: ...the job is not counted If the job is cancelled during sending it may or may not be counted depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled Even if several files are combined for sending the transmission counts as one job 8161 T PCFAX TX Jobs 8163 F PCFAX TX Jobs These SPs count the number of PC Fax transmission jobs A job is counted from when it is registered for...

Page 347: ... color charts to adjust color Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned Scans made in SP mode are not counted Examples If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored the S count is 4 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File button in ...

Page 348: ...s scanned into the document server 0 9999999 0 1 The L counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen Reading user stamp data is not counted If a job is cancelled the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets...

Page 349: ... recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting In addition the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output Scan PGS Mode 0 9999999 0 1 8231 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to determine the workload on the ADF 8231 1 Large Volume Selectable Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in the ADF at one time 8231 2 SADF Selectable Feed...

Page 350: ...999 0 1 8246 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8241 8242 8243 8245 8246 824x 1 Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 824x 2 Text Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 824x 3 Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 824x 4 GenCopy Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes 824x 5 Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes 824x...

Page 351: ... of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8281 T Scan PGS TWAIN 8285 S Scan PGS TWAIN These SPs count the number of pages scanned using a TWAIN driver These counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions 0 9999999 0 1 Note At the present time these counters perform identic...

Page 352: ...se totals to compare original page size scanning and output page size SP 8 443 S Scan PGS Size 0 9999999 0 1 8305 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output page size SP 8 445 L Scan PGS Size 0 9999999 0 1 8306 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from within th...

Page 353: ...umber of pages printed by the customer The counter for the application used for storing the pages increments 0 9999999 0 1 The L counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel Pages stored with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C counter When the A3 DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104 1 A3...

Page 354: ...pages printed from the document server The counter for the application used to print the pages is incremented The L counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel 0 9999999 0 1 Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L count Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F co...

Page 355: ...e SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window at the operation panel O PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 9999999 0 1 8427 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by Other applications 842x 1 Simplex Duplex 842x 2 Duplex Duplex 842x 3 Book Duplex 842x 4 Simplex C...

Page 356: ...t 0 9999999 0 1 8436 These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below O PrtPGS ImgEdt 0 9999999 0 1 8437 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with Other applications 843x 1 Cover Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted The count for a cover pr...

Page 357: ...umber of pages printed by the printer application S PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 9999999 0 1 8445 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner application L PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 9999999 0 1 8446 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel O PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 9999999 0 1 8447 These SPs count b...

Page 358: ... the feed rollers However these counts are based on output timing Blank sheets covers chapter covers slip sheets are also counted During duplex printing pages printed on both sides count as 1 and a page printed on one side counts as 1 C PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 9999999 0 1 8462 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy application F PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 9999999 0 1 8463 These SPs co...

Page 359: ...e with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are also counted Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document server are not counted Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce Enlarge copying are counted The magnification rates of blank cover sheets slip sheets etc are automatically assigned a rate of 100 8481 T PrtP...

Page 360: ...lation mode the total number of pages printed 8514 1 RPCS 8514 2 RPDL 8514 3 PS3 8514 4 R98 8514 5 R16 8514 6 GL GL2 8514 7 R55 8514 8 RTIFF 8514 9 PDF 8514 10 PCL5e 5c 8514 11 PCL XL 8514 12 IPDL C 8514 13 BM Links Japan Only 8514 14 Other SP8511 and SP8514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application Print jobs output to the document server are not counted CÓPIA NÃO ...

Page 361: ...tPGS FIN 0 9999999 0 1 8526 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel 852x 1 Sort 852x 2 Stack 852x 3 Staple 852x 4 Booklet 852x 5 Z Fold 852x 6 Punch 852x 7 Other NOTE 1 If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling the unstapled pages are still counted 2 The counts for sta...

Page 362: ...3 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number Note This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines For this machine the count is done for black only If a document has color and black and white pages mixed the pages are counted separately as B W or Color At the present time this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and SP8633 are...

Page 363: ...xpanded for color MFP and color LP machines For this machine the count is done for black only If a document has color and black and white pages mixed the pages are counted separately as B W or Color At the present time this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and SP8643 are the same The counts include error pages If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Grou...

Page 364: ...rver 4 Due to restrictions on some devices if Scan to Email is used to send a 10 page document to a large number of destinations the count may be divided and counted separately For example if a 10 page document is sent to 200 addresses the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations for a total of 20 T Deliv PGS Svr 0 9999999 0 1 8661 These S...

Page 365: ...le a 10 page fax is sent to location A and location B The counter goes up by 10 not 20 8691 T TX PGS LS 8692 C TX PGS LS 8693 F TX PGS LS 8694 P TX PGS LS 8695 S TX PGS LS 8696 L TX PGS LS These SPs count the number of pages sent from the document server The counter for the application that was used to store the pages is incremented 0 9999999 0 1 The L counter counts the number of pages stored fro...

Page 366: ... count the frequency of use number of rotations of the development rollers for black and other color toners Note For machines that do not support color the Black toner count is the same as the Total count Pixel Coverage Ratio 8781 This SP displays the number of toner bottles used The count is done based on the equivalent of 1 000 pages per bottle 8791 LS Memory Remain This SP displays the percent ...

Page 367: ...20 0 9999999 8861 These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color toners 8861 1 K Black toner 8861 2 M Magenta toner 8861 3 C Cyan toner 8861 4 Y Yellow toner Do not display for this machine Toner Coverage 21 30 0 9999999 8871 These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color toners 8871 1 K Black toner 8871 2 M Magenta toner 8871 3 C Cyan toner 8871 4 Y Yel...

Page 368: ... machine remains powered off with the power switches 8941 6 SC Total down time due to SC errors 8941 7 PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing 8941 8 OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning 8941 9 Supply PM Unit End Total down time due to toner end AddBook Register 8951 These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data registration 8951 1 User ...

Page 369: ...Press Copy Window to open the copy window and then select the settings for the test print paper size etc 6 Press Start C twice Ignore the Place Original messages to start the test print 7 Press SP Mode highlighted to return to the SP mode display Test Pattern Table SP2 902 2 IPU Test Print No Test Pattern No Test Pattern 0 None 8 Grayscale Horizontal 1 Vertical Line 1 dot 9 Grayscale Vertical 2 Ho...

Page 370: ...Argyle Pattern 12 Hounds Tooth Check 2 Dot Horizontal 13 Checker Flag Pattern 14 Black Band Vertical 15 Independent Pattern 4 Dot 16 Horizontal Line 1 Dot Reversed LD1 LD2 17 Grid Pattern 1 dot pair Reversed LD1 LD2 18 Independent Pattern 1 dot Reversed LD1 LD2 19 Grayscale Horizontal 20 Grayscale Vertical 21 Grayscale Horizontal Vertical 22 Grayscale Grid 23 Grayscale Horizontal Margin 24 Graysca...

Page 371: ...vated Deactivated 1 Paper Size Sensor 2 Activated Deactivated 1 Paper Feed 1 Upper Tray 0 Paper Size Sensor 1 Activated Deactivated 7 Duplex Unit Set Sensor Unit set Unit not set 6 Near End Sensor 2 Off On 5 Near End Sensor 1 Off On 4 Fusing Paper Output Motor Lock Not Locked Locked 3 Paper Size Sensor 4 Activated Deactivated 2 Paper Size Sensor 3 Activated Deactivated 1 Paper Size Sensor 2 Activa...

Page 372: ...essed cover closed Switch not pressed 5 Relay Unit Bridge Unit 0 Right Cover Switch Switch pressed cover closed Switch not pressed 7 Feed Motor Lock No Yes 6 F Gate Signal Active Not active 5 Height Sensor Feed height Not feed height 4 Paper Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 3 Fusing Unit Detected Not detected 2 Total Counter Not detected Detected 1 Key Counter Detected Not detected 6 ...

Page 373: ...ted 2 Entrance Sensor Jam Paper detected Paper not detected 1 Paper End Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 9 Duplex Unit 0 Duplex Unit Switch Cover closed Cover open 7 Tray 4 Bit 1 8 Tray 4 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 Capacity 5 Tray 3 Bit 1 1 1 Full 4 Tray 3 Bit 0 1 0 50 or more 3 Tray 2 Bit 1 0 1 10 or more 2 Tray 2 Bit 0 0 0 Out or tray not set 1 Tray 1 Bit 1 10 Remainder of Feed Tray 1 0 Tray 1 Bi...

Page 374: ... Not full or no tray Full 6 Mailbox 6 bin Not full or no tray Full 5 Mailbox 5 bin Not full or no tray Full 4 Mailbox 4 bin Not full or no tray Full 3 Mailbox 3 bin Not full or no tray Full 2 Mailbox 2 bin Not full or no tray Full 1 Mailbox 1 bin Not full or no tray Full 13 Full Exit Tray 2 0 Mailbox Proof Tray Not full or no tray Full Table 1 By pass Feed Table Paper Size Data Number Bit 4 Bit 3 ...

Page 375: ...th sensor 2 Paper not detected Paper detected 4 Original width sensor 1 Paper not detected Paper detected 3 Skew correction sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 2 Original set sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 1 Original B5 sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 1 0 Original LG sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 7 Original stopper HP sensor Original stopper up Original stopper d...

Page 376: ... time Main Machine Output Check SP5 804 1 Open SP mode 5 804 2 Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check Refer to the table on the next page 3 Press On then press Off to test the selected item NOTE You cannot exit and close this display until you press off to switch off the output check currently executing Do not keep an electrical component switched on for a long ti...

Page 377: ... Bias 20 Staple Motor Finisher 21 Punch Motor Finisher 67 Development Bias 25 LCT Motor 69 Transfer Belt Voltage 26 Bank Motor Paper Tray Unit 70 ID Sensor LED 27 Fusing Exit Motor 28 Main Motor 75 Exhaust Fan Motor 29 Duplex Transport Motor 76 Elec Equipment Cooling Fan Motor 30 Duplex Inverter Motor Rev 31 Duplex Inverter Motor Fwd 78 Relay Fan Motor 32 Feed Development Motor 79 Fusing Fan Motor...

Page 378: ...lutch 7 Inverter Solenoid 8 Pick up Motor Forward 9 Pick up Motor Reverse 5 2 7 SMC PRINT OUT LISTS SP5 990 1 Open SP mode 5 990 and select the number corresponding to the list that you wish to print SMC System Parameter and Data Lists 1 All Data List 2 SP Mode Data List 3 UP Mode Data List 4 Logging Data List 5 Self Diagnostics Results List 6 Non Default 7 NIB Summary 8 NetFile Log 21 Copy UP Mod...

Page 379: ...s Copy Window to return to the copy window 4 Place an OHP sheet A4 8 5 x 11 sideways on the by pass feed tray 5 Press Start C twice The OHP sheet will stop in the fusing unit for about 10 seconds then it exits automatically 6 Check the nip bandwidth A The relationship between the position of the pressure spring and the bandwidth is as follows NOTE Check the nip bandwidth around the center of the O...

Page 380: ...ry handler by deleting all image files on the HDD 5801 5 MCS Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored documents 5801 6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings 5801 7 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time job login ID all TX RX settings local storage file numbers and off hook timer 5801 8 Printer application Initializes the printer defaults programs r...

Page 381: ...he laser beam pitch adjustment SP2 109 Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments 3 21 Do the touch screen calibration 3 21 4 Referring to the SMC data lists re enter any values which had been changed from their factory settings Do SP 3 001 2 ID Sensor Initial Setting 6 Check the copy quality and the paper path and do any necessary adjustments CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA ...

Page 382: ... seconds the copy window will open The machine is ready for normal operation 5 2 11 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET System Setting Reset The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults Use the following procedure 1 Press User Tools Counter 2 Hold down and then press System Settings NOTE You must press first 3 When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset t...

Page 383: ...ing procedure 1 Press User Tools Counter 2 Hold down and then press Copier Document Server Settings NOTE You must press first 3 When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings press Yes 4 When the message tells you that the settings have been reset press Exit B195S904 WMF Espanol CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 384: ...ed the panel will display OK For operation panel software the Start key lights red while downloading is in progress and then lights green again after downloading is completed CAUTION Never switch off the power while downloading Switching off the power while the new software is being downloading will damage the boot files in the controller 7 After confirming that downloading is completed turn off t...

Page 385: ...NVRAM can be uploaded to and downloaded from an SD card 5 4 1 UPLOADING NVRAM DATA SP5 824 1 Turn off the main switch 2 Remove the SD card cover A 3 Insert the SD card B into SD card slot C3 4 Turn on the main switch 5 Execute SP5 824 6 Press to start uploading the NVRAM data B195S905 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 386: ...lug the SD card B into SD card slot C3 4 Turn on the main switch 5 Execute SP5 825 6 Press to start downloading the NVRAM data Note that the following errors could occur during downloading If a card is not installed in the card slot and a message tells you that downloading cannot proceed you cannot execute downloading even by pressing If the correct card for the NVRAM data is not inserted in the c...

Page 387: ...w and checks the CPU memory HDD and so on An SC code is displayed in the touch panel if the self diagnostic program detects any malfunction or abnormal condition Self Diagnostic Test Flow Power On ASIC Check Initialization Memory Check for Self Diagnostic Test SSCG Check HDD Check Memory Check OPC Check IEEE1284 I F Check CPU Check Program ROM DIMM CRC Check NVRAM Check Illegal Interrupt Check Fon...

Page 388: ...ollowing device is required in order to put the machine in the detailed self diagnosis mode No Name G02119350 Parallel Loopback Connector Executing Detailed Self Diagnosis Follow this procedure to execute detailed self diagnosis 1 Switch off the machine and connect the parallel loopback device to the Centronics I F port 2 Hold down press and hold down and then while pressing both keys at the same ...

Page 389: ...Nov 11 16 15 35 JST 2000 CPU System Bus Clock 100 0 MHz CPU Pipeline Clock 200 0 MHz Board Type 7 ASIC Version 1397306160 RTC Existence existence RAM Capacity 100 663296 MB HDD Existence existence HDD Model TotalCounter 0001000 Program No MAIN ACP82XXXX ENGINE Ver1 96 LCDC V1 39 PI ADF B3515620B SIB B0045383 FIN FIN_SDL BANK A6825150 LCT MBX FCU DPX Error List SCCODE ERROR CODE SC CODE ERROR CODE ...

Page 390: ...E UP MODE UP Mode Initial Screen User Tools Counter Display To enter the UP mode press User Tools Counter System Settings In the User Tools Counter display press System Settings Click a tab to display the settings If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner press to display more options Perform the settings press Exit to return to the User Tools Counter display and then press exit to retur...

Page 391: ...isplay more options Perform the settings press Exit to return to the User Tools Counter display and then press Exit to return to the copy window Printer Facsimile Scanner Settings In the User Tools Counter display press Printer Settings Facsimile or Scanner Settings to open the appropriate screen and then click the tab to display more settings The screen below shows the Printer Features screen B19...

Page 392: ... Counter In the User Tools Counter display press Counter View the settings press Print Counter Exit to return to the User Tools Counter display and then press Exit to return to the copy window B195S912 WMF CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 393: ... 35 cpm 180 mm s 45 cpm 230 mm s 2 Jam Detection see Note Jam Detection Off On 3 Keep at OFF 4 Print Output for Debugging Keep at OFF 5 SC Detection SC Detection Off SC Detection On JPN NA EUR Taiwan Asia Korea 6 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 7 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 8 Destination OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON NOTE Disabling jam detection is effective only for the main machine not for the options CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLAD...

Page 394: ...e follow the procedure below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the HDD Then ask the user to reproduce the problem 5 8 1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG The debug information cannot be saved until the Save Debug Log function has been switched on and a target has been selected 1 Enter the SP mode Press S Clear Modes then use the 10 key pad to enter P...

Page 395: ...hen an engine related SC code is generated 2 Controller SC Error Saves debug data when a controller related SC Code is generated 3 Any SC Error Saves data only for the SC code that you specify by entering code number 4 Jam Saves data for jams NOTE More than one event can be selected Example 1 To Select Items 1 2 4 Touch the appropriate items s Press ON for each selection This example shows Engine ...

Page 396: ...MH 4 1000 ECS 5 1025 MCS 6 4848 COPY 4400 GPS 5375 Scan 5682 NFA 7 2224 BCU 4500 PDL 5682 NFA 6600 WebDB 8 4600 GPS PM 3000 NCS 3300 PTS 9 2000 NCS 2000 NCS 6666 WebSys 10 2224 BCU 2000 NCS NOTE The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero 0 Key to Acronyms Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language GSP...

Page 397: ...e settings especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10 To switch off a key setting enter a zero for that key You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 or all by entering the corresponding 4 digit numbers from the table You cannot mix settings for the groups COPY PRINTER etc for 006 010 For example if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the settings from the 9 available selecti...

Page 398: ... on site please instruct customers to perform the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug data Such problems would include a controller or panel freeze NOTE In order to use this feature the customer engineer must have previously switched on the Save Debug Feature SP5857 001 and selected the hard disk as the save destination SP5857 002 1 When the error occurs on the operation panel...

Page 399: ...e the log can be created completely If you execute this SP to create the log file beforehand this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire the log information and save onto the HDD With the file already created on the HDD for the log file the data only needs to be recorded a new log file does not require creation To create a new log file execute SP5857 011 to delete the debug log...

Page 400: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 401: ...DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 402: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 403: ...riptions 6 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 6 1 OVERVIEW 6 1 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT B195D901 WMF 11 10 16 14 12 13 19 18 17 20 21 22 24 23 26 25 27 37 36 39 38 41 40 42 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 43 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 404: ...Motor 31 Bottom Plate 10 Hot Roller 32 Development Unit 11 Entrance Sensor 33 Charge Roller 12 Inverter Gate 34 Fθ Mirror 13 Inverter Roller 35 Barrel Toroidal Lens BTL 14 Pressure Roller 36 Polygonal Mirror Motor 15 Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 37 Laser Unit 16 Upper Transport Roller 38 Toner Bottle Holder 17 Transfer Belt 39 Exit Junction Gate 18 OPC Drum 40 Exit Roller 19 Registration Roller 41...

Page 405: ...escriptions 6 1 2 PAPER PATH 1 ARDF 2 Interchange unit 3 Duplex unit 4 By pass tray 5 Large Capacity Tray LCT 6 Paper tray unit 7 Two Tray Finisher 8 Bridge unit 9 1 Bin Tray B195D902 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 406: ...lutch 7 Development Clutch 3 Upper Paper Feed Clutch 8 Main Motor 4 Lower Paper Feed Clutch 9 Fusing Exit Motor 5 Relay Clutch In this machine the development unit is provided with its own motor separate from the main motor B195D002A WMF Development Transfer PCU Drive Fusing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 407: ... M RAM DI M M SM Bus RTC SEEP RO M 1kbi t SSC G SP I NV RA M 64 M B PHY U SB2 0 I EEE1284 W i rel ess LA N M LB2 Bl uetooth P C I R A P I Sync SCI UART UART N RS M K1I F FC UI F FAC E3 SA F B AC K UP SRAM FRO M Pri m ary B ackup Reset D I M M O pti on FA M E SP D RV LSD Pri m ary C om m C i rcui t DTM F Rec Ext Tel Li ne RG U M BU G S Rel ay Ci rcui t TEL C C UD RV EXSRA M Expan C C U I F SG 3 NEO...

Page 408: ... unit PWM control for the high voltage supply board Serial interface with peripherals Fusing control Paper feed control The IOB is located behind the rear covers for easy access The same IOB is used for both the B291 B296 and B295 B297 but the DIP switches must be set correctly for each model 3 19 2 LDB Laser Drive Board Holds the laser diodes The board and diodes are controlled by the GAVD Type R...

Page 409: ...NVRAM 32kB 2 SPI1 SD A I F SD SD SD A S IC B assoon ASIC Shaker ASIC Trumpet P C I 66 B U S 32bi t LO C A L B U S SD C L K SD Bootable SD SD 5VE 3 3VE Norm al l y ＯＮ 5V Engi ne Energy SaverO FF 1 8VE SDCLK D EB U G DEBUG 0 I F P C II F P C I A D 16 1 P C II F P C I A D 16 1 PC II F PC I C M D 3 0 PANEL I F LV C 125 V H C T244 3 3VEP 2 5VEP 1 3VEP Selectable SSCG ICS960008 RTC DEBUG 1 I F DEB UG 1...

Page 410: ...ergy save features SD This is the interface for SD card slots C1 and C2 Board Option Slots 1 2 Only one of the following options can be installed in either Slot 1 or Slot 2 IEEE1284 Interface Board B679 Centronics IEEE802 11b G813 Wireless LAN or Bluetooth Interface Unit B736 The following options can also be installed in either slot File Format Converter B609 MLB and Key Browser Unit B720 Flash R...

Page 411: ...500 6600 Font download form registration Stored on HDD even after cycling machine off on g Remains 500 5000 Job spooling area Spooling long print jobs h Remains 2000 1000 LS thumbnails MCS i Remains 200 SDK Log SDK Software Development Kit j Remains 1000 10000 For SDK SDK k Remains 200 50 Job Log l Remains 150 30 Fax Debug Log SCS Fax m Remains 300 256 Address Book Local Distribution LADP UCS n Re...

Page 412: ...mporary Pages on the HDD Application Capacity MB Pages Common Area 4415 1000 Copy 400 200 NFA 25 50 Fax 256 1000 Print Collating 100 100 Scanner 100 50 Remote Fax 64 100 Sample Print MCS Thumbnails 10 10 Swapping Other CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 413: ...s a high electrical resistance in the dark Laser exposure Processed data from the scanned original is retrieved from the memory and transferred to the drum by two laser beams C which form an electrostatic latent image on the drum surface The amount of charge remaining as a latent image on the drum depends on the laser beam intensity controlled by the BICU Development The magnetic developer brush o...

Page 414: ...f the electrical attraction between the paper and the transfer belt Pick off pawls F help separate the paper from the drum ID sensor The ID sensor G measures the reflectivity of the pattern formed by the laser on the surface of the drum This output signal is used for toner supply control and also measures the drum surface reflectivity which is used for charge roller voltage control Cleaning The dr...

Page 415: ...ors and through the lens on the lens block The 1st scanner consists of the exposure lamp a reflector and the 1st mirror The exposure lamp is energized by a dc supply to avoid uneven light intensity while the 1st scanner moves in the sub scan direction down the page The entire exposure lamp surface is frosted to ensure even exposure in the main scan direction across the page The light reflected by ...

Page 416: ... is done by changing the scanner drive motor speed and in the main scan direction it is done by image processing on the BICU board NOTE Magnification in the sub scan direction can be adjusted by changing the scanner drive motor speed using SP4 008 ADF mode The scanners are always kept at their home position the scanner home position sensor E detects the 1st scanner to scan the original The ADF mot...

Page 417: ... these sensors are active and the original size data is always sent to the CPU However the CPU checks the data only when the platen cover sensor C is activated after the platen reaches about 15 cm above the exposure glass as it is closed The main CPU detects the original size by the on off signals received from the APS sensors NOTE If the copy is made with the platen fully open the main CPU determ...

Page 418: ...r present X Low For other combinations CANNOT DETECT ORIG SIZE will be indicated on the operation panel display The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size This original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre scan and increases the machine s productivity However if the by pass tray is used note that the machine assumes that the copy paper is lengthwise...

Page 419: ...The IPU on the BICU processes auto shading filtering magnification γ correction and gradation The memory controller performs image compression decompression and memory address control for binary picture processing mode only LD Unit Performs dual channel multi beam exposure multiple exposure and synchronous detection Controller Performs dual channel multi beam exposure multiple exposure and synchro...

Page 420: ...xels to match the odd pixels Signal composition Analog signals for odd and even pixels from the CCD are merged by a switching device Signal amplification The analog signal is amplified by amplifiers in the AGC circuit The maximum gains of the amplifiers are controlled by the CPU on the BICU board After the above processing the analog signals are converted to 8 bit signals by the A D converter This...

Page 421: ...ines the reference value for A D conversion for the scan line Then the IPU sends the reference value to the A D controller on the SBU When an original with a gray background is scanned the density of the gray area is the peak white level density Therefore the original background will not appear on copies Because peak level data is taken for each scan line ADS corrects for any changes in background...

Page 422: ...g processes on the image data 1 Auto shading 2 Filtering MTF and smoothing 3 Magnification 4 γ correction 5 Grayscale processing 6 Binary picture processing 7 Error diffusion 8 Dithering 9 Video path control 10 Test pattern generation The image data then goes to the HDD HDD Controller SBU SIB Mother Board IPU BICU FCI GAVD LD Driver LDDR LD 1 LD 2 B195D906 WMF CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTRO...

Page 423: ... settings To display this screen press User Tools Counter Copier Document Server Settings General Features Copy Quality Mode Function Text Best reproduction of text and sharp lines Ignores background texture pg 6 24 Text Photo Good reproduction of mixed text and photographs with accurate gray scaling better than that achieved in the Text mode pg 6 25 Photo Best possible reproduction of photographs...

Page 424: ...d Erase Pre Filter Smoothing Main Scan Magnification Text Photo Photo Primary Compression Decompression Controller Independent Dot Erase HDD Filtering Text Pale Generation Secondary Compression Decompression γ Coefficient Sent to HDD Video Control Scanner Printer Application Grayscale Processing FCU FAX Application LD Unit CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 425: ...justing multiple adjacent pixels in the direction of main scanning Adjustment of magnification in the sub scan direction is done by changing the scanning speed Independent dot erase Attempts to recognize and eliminate scattered independent dots in copies Processes only pixels of high density and eliminates those of low density Filtering MTF filter smoothing Performs mainly edge enhancement with th...

Page 426: ...of the Normal setting thus increasing the sharpness of lines Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes Scanner Image Correction Shading Correction Pre Filter Processing Background Erase SP4903 65 Background Erase Level Text Mode Pre Filter Smoothing SP4903 10 Pre Filter Text Magnification Main Scan Direction SP2909 1 Main Scan Magnification Independent Dot Erase SP4903 60 Independent Dot Erase Text M...

Page 427: ... an MTF filter stronger than that of the Normal setting thus increasing the sharpness of lines Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes Scanner Image Correction Shading Correction Pre Filter Processing Background Erase SP4903 67 Background Erase Level Text Photo Mode Pre Filter Smoothing SP4903 13 Pre Filter Text Photo Magnification Main Scan Direction SP2909 1 Main Scan Magnification Independent Do...

Page 428: ...ures used depend on which type of gray scale processing has been selected for Photo mode either dithering and smoothing or error diffusion and MTF this depends on the setting of SP 4904 001 Details are explained later in this section Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes Scanner Image Correction Shading Correction Pre Filter Processing Background Erase SP4903 66 Background Erase Level Photo Mode ...

Page 429: ...ness of lines Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes Scanner Image Correction Shading Correction Pre Filter Processing Background Erase SP4903 68 Background Erase Level Light Original Pre Filter Smoothing SP4903 15 Pre Filter Light Magnification Main Scan Direction SP2909 1 Main Scan Magnification Independent Dot Erase SP4903 63 Independent Dot Erase Light Original Filter Processing MTF Correction...

Page 430: ...e Processing Flow Related SP Modes Scanner Image Correction Shading Correction Pre Filter Processing Background Erase SP44903 69 Background Erase Level Generation Copy Pre Filter Smoothing SP4903 16 Pre Filter Generation Copy Magnification Main Scan Direction SP2909 1 Main Scan Magnification Independent Dot Erase SP4903 64 Independent Dot Erase Generation Copy Generation Mode SP4903 75 77 Line Wid...

Page 431: ... and hold down on the 10 key pad then Copy SP on the touch screen These SP mode settings are provided to reduce the incidence of moiré in the reproduction of images whose data signals have been compressed in the direction of the main scan However these SP adjustments can cause different effects in the reproduction of images depending on Whether they contain areas shaded with dot screening newspape...

Page 432: ... up to 20 is set to 0 and cut from the image The range for this SP code adjustment is 0 255 The recommended range for a normal document is 0 60 An official document on rough texture paper would fall in the recommended range of 120 160 The correct setting for any original will vary with the texture and quality of the background but remember that selecting a higher numbers for this setting will even...

Page 433: ...re can be adjusted for each mode The filter compares each pixel with the pixels around an area 7 pixels x 7 lines If the sum of the pixels at the edges is smaller than the threshold value the object pixel is changed to zero white depending on the strength of the SP mode setting Setting a larger setting increases the number of dots erased but if set too high this SP can also remove small or fine te...

Page 434: ...direction of feed A SP4903 77 LWC Threshold Sub Scan Generation Mode Targets sub scan lines at right angles to the direction of feed B For sharp thin lines set SP4903 75 for a higher LWC setting and for softer lines set a lower setting For thick lines select 3 To thin or thicken lines in the main scan direction select an SP4903 75 setting larger or smaller than the setting for SP4903 76 To thin or...

Page 435: ... codes NOTE In the tables below the master SP codes are set in bold type The slave SP codes are indented and set in normal type Keep the following points in mind while you are using these SP codes The slave SP codes cannot be accessed until the master SP is set to 0 For the slave SP code settings to take effect the master SP code must remain set to 0 If the master SP code is reset to any value oth...

Page 436: ...eneral Quality 65 154 SP4903 024 Main Scan Filter Level Text 65 154 SP4903 025 Sub Scan Filter Level Text 65 154 SP4903 026 Main Scan Filter Strength Text 65 154 SP4903 027 Sub Scan Filter Strength Text 65 154 SP4904 022 0 Text General Quality 155 256 SP4903 028 Main Scan Filter Level Text 155 256 SP4903 029 Sub Scan Filter Level Text 155 256 SP4903 030 Main Scan Filter Strength Text 155 256 SP490...

Page 437: ...aster SP codes gross adjustment of the image processing mode after you have set SP4904 001 1 for error diffusion If you need to fine adjust a master setting set the master setting to 0 to access its slave SP codes Adjust the image for the Photo mode with the one master setting within its allowed range for the range see Section 5 Service Tables To fine adjust the master setting set it to 0 then per...

Page 438: ...6 SP4903 048 Text Photo All Coefficient 155 256 SP4903 085 Filter Strength Text Photo Edge 155 256 SP4903 086 Filter Adj Text Photo Edge Det 155 256 SP4903 087 Filter Adj Text Photo Mag 155 256 SP4904 010 Gray Adj Text Photo Edge Det 155 256 SP4904 028 0 Text Photo General Quality 257 400 SP4903 051 Text Photo Edge Coefficient 257 400 SP4903 052 Text Photo All Coefficient 257 400 SP4903 088 Filter...

Page 439: ...e General Quality SP4903 055 Filter Level Light Original SP4903 056 Filter Strength Light Original Generation Copy Mode Adjust the image for the Generation Copy mode with the one master setting within its allowed range for range see Section 5 Service Tables To fine adjust the master setting set it to 0 then perform the adjustments listed below SP4904 030 0 Generation General Quality SP4903 057 Fil...

Page 440: ...n also cause moiré to appear in photos on the same original Conversely weakening the MTF filter softens the edges of text characters and reduces the occurrence of moiré but low contrast characters may fade Strengthen or weaken the MTF filter for the Text mode only when necessary Adjustment of the MTF filter coefficient performs very fine level adjustment of the applied strength of the MTF filter A...

Page 441: ...Selecting a larger value sharpens the clarity However increasing the value also increases the possibility of producing moiré in the image Filter Setting All Column 3 Provides filter processing for the overall image not to improve just text lines or photographs but to improve the image as a whole This filter coefficient reduces the incidence of moiré in images that contain shaded areas created with...

Page 442: ...listed in the table below are used to adjust MTF filter coefficient and strength for the Pale mode and Generation Copy modes Mode Coefficient Strength Pale Mode SP4903 55 SP4903 56 Generation Copy SP4903 57 SP4903 58 Ranges 0 6 0 7 Strengthening the MTF filter sharpens the edges of text characters and improves the appearance of low contrast text but can also cause moiré to appear in photos on the ...

Page 443: ...case the filter processing means smoothing only The filter coefficient for smoothing can be adjusted with SP4904 37 Smoothing Filter in Photo Mode If 1 is selected then the image grayscales are processed with error diffusion processing just as they are processed with the Normal and Glossy Photo settings on the operation panel The MTF filter applied is the same as that applied for the Normal settin...

Page 444: ...n Picture Quality Text Quality Processing Priority 0 8 x 8 75 lines High Low Dot screen areas 1 8 x 8 106 lines Highest Low Filled areas highest priority Default 2 6 x 6 142 lines Medium Medium Filled areas 3 4 x 4 212 lines Low High Resolution For these dither adjustments to take effect SP4904 1 Grayscale Photo Mode must be set to 0 to enable dithering Here are some general rules If your main con...

Page 445: ...lines Density Settings This section describes how to adjust the density settings for the Pale mode Generation Copy mode and Text mode SP4904 3 is used to switch the density characteristics to binary digital processing for black and white originals to achieve better balance between text and images correct shadows that appear around text in handwritten documents to enhance documents written in penci...

Page 446: ... to 2 pressing the Auto Image Density key toggles the display off and manual notch 2 is selected This SP code is adjusted if the customer cannot attain clean copies after performing automatic density adjustment This mode prevents the background of an original from appearing on copies The copier scans the auto image density detection area a narrow strip at one end of the main scan line As the scann...

Page 447: ...ext Photo mode User Tools De emphasize fine lines in jagged valleys and reduce the occurrence of moiré Select Soft for Text mode User Tools Weaken the MTF filters for Text mode SP4903 24 Main Scan 9 SP4903 25 Sub Scan 13 SP4903 26 Main Scan 2 SP4903 27 Sub Scan 2 Reduce the occurrence of moiré when reducing the size of the original for copying Select Soft for Text mode User Tools Weaken the MTF fi...

Page 448: ...03 25 Sub Filter Level 13 11 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 SP4903 26 Main Filter Strength 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 SP4903 26 Sub Filter Strength 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 Text Mode 155 256 MTF Strength Strong Default Weak Default Settings Sharp Normal Soft SP4903 28 Main Filter Level 11 10 9 9 14 12 10 9 9 SP4903 29 Sub Filter Level 13 13 13 10 13 13 13 13 10 SP4903 30 Main Filter Strength 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 SP4903 31 Sub...

Page 449: ...55 Filter Level Light Original 5 4 3 2 6 4 3 2 6 SP4903 56 Filter Strength Light Original 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 2 Generation Copy Mode MTF Strength Strong Default Weak Default Settings Sharp Normal Soft SP4903 55 Filter Level Light Original 2 6 5 4 3 2 6 5 4 SP4903 56 Filter Strength Light Original 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 450: ...ons for the laser power The output path from the laser diode to the drum is shown above The LD unit outputs two laser beams to the polygon mirror through the cylindrical lens and the shield glass Each surface of the polygon mirror reflects two full main scan lines The laser beams go to the F theta mirror mirror and BTL barrel toroidal lens Then these laser beams go to the drum through the toner sh...

Page 451: ...ture increases In order to keep the output level constant the LDDR monitors the electrical current passing through the photodiode PD Then it increases or decreases the current to the laser diode as necessary comparing it with the reference level This auto power control is done just after the machine is turned on and during printing while the laser diode is active The reference levels are adjusted ...

Page 452: ...gon motor and reduces the frequency of the image data clock The two laser beams follow the path collimating lenses C prism D polygon mirror E The two laser beams arrive on the drum surface about 2 mm apart in the main scan direction and about 0 06 mm apart at 400 dpi in the sub scan direction The two mm difference in the main scan direction allows the machine to detect the laser synchronization si...

Page 453: ...Both LD unit positions are at fixed distances from the LD unit home position sensor C Usually the LD unit moves directly to the proper position However when the number of times that the resolution has changed reaches the value of SP2 109 5 LD Beam Pitch Adjustment the LD unit moves to the home position and this re calibrates the LD unit positioning mechanism B195D543 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

Page 454: ...aser diode is switched off when the front cover or upper right cover is opened Four safety switches are installed in series on the LD5 V line from the power supply unit PSU via the BICU board CN403 1 CN403 3 CN402 1 4 14 CN312 15 4 2 CN109 8 CN301 10 5V PSU BICU LDDR 5V LD5V LD1 LD2 Front Cover Safety Switch Upper Right Cover Switch B195D930 WMF CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 455: ...oner Collection Coil 2 Toner Collection Plate 3 Image Density Sensor 4 Pick off Pawl 5 OPC Drum φ60 mm 6 Transfer Entrance Guide 7 Charge Roller 8 Charge Roller Cleaning Roller 9 Drum Cleaning Blade 2 10 Quenching Lamp 11 Drum Cleaning Blade 1 B195D931 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 8 9 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 456: ...leaning blade in contact with the drum This cleaning blade is not a counter blade The tension of these springs has been reduced for this model in order to reduce the amount of pressure applied by the blade against the drum Every time the PCU is opened for replacement or cleaning the spring closest to the front of the PCU must move in order to retract the cleaning blade away from the OPC drum After...

Page 457: ...el E on the end of the drum drive shaft stabilizes the rotation speed this prevents banding and jitter on copies 6 7 4 DRUM PAWLS The pick off pawls A mounted in the holders B on the drum and in contact with the drum strip the paper from the drum if it has not yet separated The gears C are removable and the positions of the holders can be adjusted 6 7 5 DRUM TONER SEALS Seals have been added to th...

Page 458: ...A contacts the surface of the drum B to give it a negative charge The high voltage supply board C supplies a negative dc voltage to the drum charge roller through the charge roller terminal D bias plate E and the rear roller bushing F to give the drum surface a negative charge of 850V B195D936 WMF A B C D E F CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 459: ...ensor pattern for toner density control After creating ID sensor pattern another pattern is made To do this the LD switches off the charge roller voltage drops and the drum potential is reduced to 600V At the same time development bias returns to 550V The drum potential is now slightly higher than the development bias so only a very small amount of toner transfers to the drum The ID sensor measure...

Page 460: ...djustment Width 216 297 mm Default 1450 V SP2309 1 Paper Lower Width a Width limit Default 150 mm SP2309 2 Paper Upper Width b Width limit Default 216 mm SP2914 1 C alpha Adjust 10V step Default 150 V SP2914 2 C beta Adjust 10V step Default 0 V The way that these SP modes are used is shown below For example with the default settings if the paper width fed from the by pass tray is 200 mm the charge...

Page 461: ... adjusted with SP2 210 ID Sensor Pattern Interval 6 8 5 DRUM CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING The drum charge roller A always in contact with the drum gets dirty easily The brush roller B remains in contact with the charger roller to clean the charge roller New Vref Decision 1 10 9 8 3 2 Vref Decision 1 3 2 12 15 14 13 Series of copies ID sensor pattern Vsp Vsg ID sensor pattern Vsp Vsg New Vref Decision B1...

Page 462: ...B296 B297 6 60 SM 6 9 DEVELOPMENT 6 9 1 OVERVIEW 1 Drum 5 Mixing Auger 2 Development Roller 6 Development Filter 3 Paddle Roller 7 Doctor Blade 4 TD Sensor B195D939 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 463: ... consists of the outer paddle A and the inner auger B The outer paddle moves developer to the front and supplies it to the development roller Developer that spills off by the doctor blade passes through the holes C in the outer paddle and is transported to the rear by the inner auger While the dual mixing roller is moving the developer some developer also passes back to the development unit throug...

Page 464: ...by the paper trays Thicker paper OHP sheets etc can also be loaded in the by pass tray but adjustments must be performed with the SP modes listed below in order to avoid jams and misfeeds SP Mode SP Name SP2201 1 Development Bias Width 216 297 mm Default 560V SP2309 1 Paper Lower Width a Width limit Default 150 mm SP2309 2 Paper Upper Width b Width limit Default 216 mm SP2914 3 Process Control Set...

Page 465: ...led in the holder This prevents toner falling out of the holder unit as a result of lowering the handle with no toner bottle installed Until the holder and bottle have been pushed into the machine completely and locked in place Instruct the customer to always follow the bottle replacement instructions of the new decal attached to the toner bottle The toner bottle has a spiral groove H which rotate...

Page 466: ...upply mylar blades C transfer the toner to slit D Installing the PCU opens the shutter E The toner falls into the development unit through the port F The left side of the entrance seal G is higher than the right This improves the efficiency of seal on the left side especially when the PCU is removed B195D943 WMF B195D944 WMF B195D924 WMF A B C D E F G CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 467: ...ailed Descriptions Toner Scatter Prevention To reduce toner scattering a velvet strip A extends across the length of the fusing unit Seals are attached at each end of the strip B and C B195D945 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 468: ...ely 20 g of toner per 500 g of developer 4 0 by weight the TD sensor must be set to its initial setting of 3 0V with SP2 801 This initial setting is used as the toner supply reference voltage or Vref For every copy cycle the TD sensor directly checks the toner density in the developer mixture and after 10 copies these 10 readings are averaged and this value becomes TD sensor output voltage Vt 10 T...

Page 469: ... supplied per second set with SP2209 1 drops to 25 2 the current output of the TD sensor Vt has dropped below the target value after 40 samples and then 3 still fails to detect the target Vt after an additional 40 samples The machine determines that the toner density is too light after it detects that 1 the difference between Vref the TD sensor reference voltage and the averaged density of the pre...

Page 470: ...ched the standard level the toner supply motor rotates continuously until it does maximum motor on time is 16 seconds and then it will switch off 6 9 8 TONER SUPPLY WITH ABNORMAL SENSORS The TD sensor is checked every copy If the readings from the TD sensor become abnormal during a copy job the machine holds the GAIN factor constant GAIN is normally calculated from TD sensor readings to allow tone...

Page 471: ...he cleaning blade side to side This side to side movement disperses accumulated toner to prevent early blade edge wear at one location The drum reverses about 5 mm after every print job to remove particles on the edge of the cleaning blade 6 10 2 TONER RECYCLING Toner collected by the toner collection coil A is transported to the opening B This toner falls into the development unit with new toner ...

Page 472: ...Lower paper size dial 6 Upper separation roller 14 Lower paper size switch 7 Lower relay sensor 15 Upper paper size dial 8 Lower relay roller 16 Upper paper size switch Each paper tray which employs the FRR system can hold 500 sheets Two relay sensors positioned above each set of relay rollers detect paper jams A selection dial allows you to select the setting for the size of the paper loaded in t...

Page 473: ...r feed clutch stays on until shortly after the registration sensor C actuates 6 11 3 PICK UP AND SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM When the paper tray A is not inside the machine the separation roller B is away from the paper feed roller C and the pick up roller D stays in the upper position When the paper tray is set into the machine it pushes the release lever E This causes the pick up roller ...

Page 474: ... height for paper feed the paper pushes up the pick up roller and the actuator J on the pick up roller supporter activates the paper height sensor K to stop the tray lift motor After several paper feed cycles the paper level gradually lowers and the paper height sensor is de activated The tray lift motor turns on again until this sensor is activated again When the paper tray is removed from the ma...

Page 475: ...e paper tray the paper end feeler A is raised by the paper stack and the paper end sensor B is deactivates When the paper tray runs out of paper the paper end feeler drops into the cutout C in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated B195D954 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 476: ...paper to press against the registration rollers and buckle slightly to correct any skew The registration sensor also detects misfeeds Next the registration clutch F actuates and the relay clutch at the correct time to align the paper with the image on the drum The registration rollers then feed the paper to the image transfer section Two new dust blades have been added around the registration roll...

Page 477: ...nter control board recognizes that the paper tray is not installed When the paper size actuator is at the mark the paper tray can be set up to accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using one of the user tools on the machine s operation panel Models Paper Size Switch North America Europe Asia 1 2 3 4 81 2 x 13 Portrait A3 Portrait ON ON OFF ON A4 Landscape A4 Landscape ON ON ON ON A4 P...

Page 478: ...291 B295 B296 B297 6 76 SM 6 12 BY PASS TRAY 6 12 1 OVERVIEW 1 Paper feed roller 2 Paper end sensor 3 Pick up roller 4 By pass tray 5 Separation roller B195D956 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 479: ...through gear A When the print key is pressed the pick up solenoid B turns on and the pick up roller C moves onto the paper When the by pass tray runs out of paper the paper end feeler D drops into the cutout in the by pass tray and the paper end sensor E is activated B195D957 WMF B195D958 WMF A C B D E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 480: ... the terminal plate The pattern for each paper width is unique Therefore the copier determines which paper has been placed in the by pass tray by the signal output from the board However the copier does not determine the paper length from the by pass tray hardware B195D959 WMF A3 B4 A4L B5L A5L B6L 51 2 81 2 11 B195D960 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 481: ...7 Detailed Descriptions 6 13 DUPLEX UNIT 6 13 1 OVERVIEW 1 Entrance sensor 4 Upper transport roller 2 Inverter gate 5 Lower transport roller 3 Inverter roller 6 Exit sensor B195D961 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 482: ... B295 B296 B297 6 80 SM 6 13 2 DUPLEX DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Inverter roller 4 Transport motor 2 Inverter motor 5 Lower transport roller 3 Upper transport roller B195D962 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 483: ... pages The number B in the illustration shows the order of sheets of copy paper if shaded this indicates the second side Up to A4 lengthwise LT lengthwise The duplex unit can store two sheets of copy paper Example 8 pages The number A in the illustration shows the order of pages The number B in the illustration shows the order of sheets of copy paper if shaded this indicates the second side B195D9...

Page 484: ...4 LT in the reverse feed path which has been lengthened in the design of this machine Inversion and Exit The inverter gate solenoid turns on and the inverter motor turns on in reverse shortly after the trailing edge of the paper passes through the entrance sensor D As a result the inverter gate E is opened and the inverter roller rotates counterclockwise The paper is sent to the copier through the...

Page 485: ...ANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION 6 14 1 OVERVIEW 1 Transfer belt 6 OPC 2 Drive roller 7 Pick off pawls 3 Transfer belt cleaning blade 8 ID sensor 4 Transfer roller 9 Contact lever 5 Idle roller 10 Transfer belt contact clutch cam B195D966 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 6 9 10 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 486: ...st not remain in contact for too long to prevent contamination of the drum with oil or other foreign material from the transfer belt 6 14 3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM The belt contact and release mechanism consists of the belt contact clutch A cam B and contact lever C The belt contact clutch turns on and the cam attached to the clutch rotates half a complete rotation The contact lever r...

Page 487: ...ansfer belt contact clutch switches on and the transfer belt touches the drum When the paper enters the gap between the belt and the drum the high voltage supply board D applies a high positive current to the belt to transfer the image to the paper After receiving the image from the drum the paper is fed by the belt The paper moves to the end of the transfer belt unit where it separates from the b...

Page 488: ...D and the bias roller E The high voltage supply board adjusts the current to the roller to keep a small but constant current flow to ground through the belt paper and drum If this current is not kept constant efficiency of toner transfer and paper separation will vary with paper thickness type environmental condition or changes in transfer belt surface resistance B195D973 WMF A B C D E CÓPIA NÃO C...

Page 489: ...ectly from the transfer belt to the drum and not through the paper which could cause an insufficient amount of toner to transfer to narrow width paper Thick paper must be fed from the by pass tray because SP modes are available only for the by pass tray in order to accommodate thick paper By default the current for paper narrower than 216 mm is 1 5 times the normal current This illustration shows ...

Page 490: ... be changed The table below lists the SP modes you can use to adjust these settings SP2 301 Transfer Current Adjustment Image Areas SP2 301 1 1st Side of Paper SP2 301 2 2nd Side of Paper SP2 301 4 By pass Feed 45 PPM SP2 301 6 By pass Feed 35 PPM Leading Edge Areas SP2 301 3 Leading Edge SP2 301 5 Leading Edge By pass Feed 35 PPM SP2 301 7 Leading Edge By pass Feed 45 PPM SP2 911 Transfer Current...

Page 491: ...d paper dust remaining on the transfer belt Scraped off toner and paper dust falls into the toner collection tank B in the transfer belt unit This toner is not recycled When the toner overflow sensor C detects toner overflow the toner overflow indicator lights Up to 999 copies can be made before the toner overflow condition shuts down the machine B195D975 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO C...

Page 492: ... 3 Junction gate 12 Fusing lamp center 4 Idle roller duplex unit 13 Fusing lamp ends 5 Fusing unit exit sensor 14 Thermistors center end 6 Spring 15 Thermostats center end 7 Fusing exit guide plate 16 Hot roller 8 Pressure roller 17 Hot roller strippers 9 Pressure arm 18 Exit roller B195D976 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 493: ... a timing belt D 6 15 3 FUSING DRIVE RELEASE MECHANISM The fusing unit drive release mechanism automatically disengages the fusing unit drive gear A when the right door B is opened When the right cover is opened the actuator plate C pulls release wire D The wire pulls the fusing drive gear bracket E and the fusing unit drive is disengaged B195D603 WMF B195D978 WMF A B C D E A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTR...

Page 494: ...ents thin paper from buckling against the hot roller which can cause blurring at the leading edge of the copy 6 15 5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE AND DE CURLER ROLLERS The exit guide plate A also functions as a pressure roller stripper The exit guide plate can be moved in order to remove jammed paper Stacking has been improved by mounting a face curl correction mechanism at the paper exit roller Two de curler...

Page 495: ...prings to keep the pressure roller pressing against the hot roller with constant pressure This prevents the pressure roller from flattening and increasing the width of the nip band as shown at A This can lead to paper slippage and paper jams in the fusing unit Until the machine is installed two screws and maintain a gap between the pressure roller and hot roller This relieves pressure on the surfa...

Page 496: ... in constant contact with the pressure roller B collects toner and paper dust from the surface of the pressure roller Because the cleaning roller is metal it can collect adhering matter better than the pressure roller which is coated with Teflon B195D983A WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 497: ... with SP5959 The amount of time for free rotation can be adjusted with this SP code Make sure that the customer understands that increasing this SP setting slows down the start of the job The machine switches on the fusing exit motor and rotates the drum after the job The drum rotation sequence at the end of a job depends on the size of the job Small Jobs After the machine prints a total of 5 shee...

Page 498: ...r 15 sec pauses for 15 sec then switches on again for 15 sec Large Jobs After the machine prints a job of over 100 continuous pages the 1st Cleaning is done there is a pause of 45 sec then the 1st cleaning is done again Job End Fusing Motor 15 s 15 s 15 s 15 s B195D922 WMF Job End Fusing Motor 15 s 15 s 15 s 45 s B195D923 WMF 1st Cleaning x2 1st Cleaning 45 sec wait 1st Cleaning CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLA...

Page 499: ... 1st Cleaning is done once then done again after a 15 sec interval Large Jobs on previous page Default 100 3905 005 No addtnl sheets for 3rd HR stripper cleaning Sets the number of times that the cycle for SP3905 004 is repeated for Large Jobs Default 0 If set to 1 for example the cleaning sequence is repeated once 3905 006 Job HR stripper cleaning priority setting This SP determines what happens ...

Page 500: ...the fusing roller and the second fusing lamp ends 650W B heats both ends of the hot roller This arrangement ensures even heat on all surfaces of the roller In order to control the temperature of the roller two high response thermistors are attached to the unit one near the center C and one at the end D of the hot roller B195D985A WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 501: ...perate The reload temperature is 3 C below the fusing temperature this depends on the settings of SP1105 1 4 7 8 As soon as the thermistors detect the fusing temperature the CPU switches the lamps off but frequently switches on off again in order to maintain the fusing temperature The default temperatures of SP1105 for these models are set 10 30 degrees lower than the temperatures for the previous...

Page 502: ...is done when the temperature reaches the print ready re load temperature The re load temperature can be adjusted with SP1105 5 6 In the opposite case even if fusing idling is disabled it is done when the temperature at power up 15 C The fusing idling time is as follows Fusing Idling Mode Temperature at power on 0 Disabled 1 Enabled SP1103 1 15 C or less 30 s 30 s Higher than 15 C Not done 30 s SP1...

Page 503: ...arding cpm down for thick paper on the 45 cpm machine When the line speed switches from 45 cpm to 35 cpm for thick paper the transfer current changes to the settings specified with SP2301 Transfer Current Adjustment For details see Section 5 Service Tables Bias voltage development and other settings are not affected Fusing temperature adjustment switches on but no operation can start until the mac...

Page 504: ...ode Auto off timer UP mode Auto off disabling SP mode B195D987 WMF Stand by Mode Energy Saver Mode Low Power Mode Auto Off Mode Off Stand by Mode Off Mode FAX RX etc Printer Data in After Printing Energy Saver Key Off Return Time Less than 3 s Energy Saver Key On or Energy Saver Timer 10 s to 4 hrs Default 60 s Operation Sw Off or Auto Off Timer Energy Saver Timer Operation Sw Off or Auto Off Time...

Page 505: ...nd the Power LED If the CPU receives the image print out command from an application e g to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC the fusing temperature rises to print the data Return to stand by mode If one of the following is done the machine returns to stand by mode The Clear Mode Energy Saver Mode key is pressed Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed An or...

Page 506: ...r off If one or more of the following conditions exits the machine enters Off Stand by mode If none of these conditions exist the machine enters Off Mode Error or SC condition An optional G4 unit is installed Image data is stored in the memory During memory TX or polling RX The handset is off hook An original is in the ADF The ADF is open Off Stand by mode The system 5V is still supplied to all co...

Page 507: ...machine returns to the Off Stand by mode and the system 5V and 24V supplies are activated Returning to stand by mode The machine returns to stand by mode when the operation switch is pressed The recovery time is about 10 s B291 B296 or 15 s for the B295 B297 Mode Operation Switch Energy Saver Mode Fusing Lamp 24V System 5V Note Off Stand by Off Off Off On when printing On On Off Off Off Off Off Of...

Page 508: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 509: ...SPECIFICATIONS CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 510: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 511: ...e B291 B296 4 1 s 1st Tray A4 81 2 x 11 LEF B295 B297 3 5 s 1st Tray A4 81 2 x 11 LEF B291 B296 Less than 12 5 s Basic 15 s MFP Warm up Time B295 B297 Less than 12 5 s Basic 15 s MFP Continuous Copy 1 999 operation panel entry Paper Capacity 1 050 sheets 500 sheets tray x 2 with 50 sheets in by pass tray A4 81 2 x 11 and smaller 500 sheets Paper Output B4 and larger 250 sheets North America 120V 6...

Page 512: ...ss than 125W NA Less than 159W EU Asia Less than 130W EU Asia Less than 149W Auto Off Mode NA Ave 8 5W NA Ave 8 5 EU Asia Ave 8 5 EU Asia Ave 8 5 Maximum Less than 1 44 kW NA Less than 1 5 kW EU Asia Less than 1 44 kW NA Less than 1 5 kW EU Asia Noise Emission Mode Model Mainframe Only Full System Copying B291 B296 NA 64 0 NA 69 8 EU Asia 65 0 EU Asia 65 0 B295 B297 NA 67 0 NA 70 9 EU Asia 67 0 EU...

Page 513: ...ay finisher 2 shift trays 3 One bin tray 10 Booklet Finisher 4 Duplex unit 11 1000 Sheet Finisher 1 shift tray 5 By pass tray 12 Bridge Unit 6 LCT Large Capacity Tray 7 Copier NOTE The Bridge Unit is required for the optional finishers B195V901 WMF 8 1 3 4 10 2 5 11 9 7 6 12 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 514: ...count Enhance Unit C G395 PI Board Kit C B669 Data Overwrite Security C B735 Copy Data Security Unit C B770 Copier Scanner Accessibility Option U B815 Fax Option Type 3045 U B779 G3 Interface Unit U B780 SAF Memory C G578 Fax Handset USA model only C A646 Printer Scanner Unit Type 4500 U D315 Printer Unit U D316 RPCS Printer Unit U D317 Printer Upgrade Unit Type 4500 U D319 11 Scanner Upgrade Unit...

Page 515: ...ge 30 200 Sub scan direction only Power Source DC 24V 5V from the copier Power Consumption Less than 60 W Dimensions W D H 570 mm x 518 mm x 150 mm 22 4 x 20 4 x 5 9 Weight 12 kg PAPER TRAY UNIT B542 Paper Size A5 SEF to A3 SEF 51 2 x 81 2 SEF to 11 x 17 SEF Paper Weight 64 g m2 105 g m2 20 lb 28 lb Tray Capacity 500 sheets 80 g m2 20 lb Paper Feed System FRR Paper Height Detection 4 steps 100 70 ...

Page 516: ...81 2 x 11 Paper Weight Staple Mode Off 60 to 157 g m2 16 43 lb Staple Mode On 64 to 90 g m2 17 24 lb Stapler Capacity 30 sheets A3 B4 11 x 17 81 2 x 14 50 sheets A4 B5 81 2 x 11 Paper Capacity Staple Mode Off 1 000 sheets A4 81 2 x 11 or smaller 80 g m2 20 lb 500 sheets A3 B4 11 x 17 81 2 x 14 80 g m2 20 lb Staple Mode On 80 g m2 20 lb Number of Sets Set Size 10 to 50 Size 2 to 9 10 to 30 31 to 50...

Page 517: ...ti tray Staple Mode 1500 sheets A4S LTS 80 g m2 20 lb 750 sheets A3 B5 DLT LTL 80 g m2 20 lb 500 sheets A5S 80 g m2 20 lb 100 sheets A5L HLT 80 g m2 20 lb Lower Tray Normal Mode 2000 sheets A4S LTS 80 g m2 20 lb 750 sheets A3 B5 DLT LTL 80 g m2 20 lb 500 sheets A5S 80 g m2 20 lb 100 sheets A5L HLT 80 g m2 20 lb Stapler Tray Capacity No Mixed Original Mode 50 sheets A4 B5 LT 80 g m2 20 lb 30 sheets...

Page 518: ... to 42 lb Staple mode 64 g m2 to 80 g m2 17 to 21 lb Paper Weight Saddle stitch mode 64 g m2 to 80 g m2 17 to 21 lb 64 g m2 to 128 g m2 17 to 34 lb Cover sheet only Tray Modes Paper size Capacity A4 LEF LT LEF or shorter 150 sheets Proof tray A4 SEF LT SEF or longer 75 sheets A4 LEF LT LEF or shorter 1000 sheets No staple A4 SEF LT SEF or longer 500 sheet A4 LEF LT LEF or shorter 750 sheets or 30 ...

Page 519: ...r Power Consumption Less than 170 W Dimensions w x d x h 689 x 603 x 1055 mm 27 1 x 23 7 x 41 5 in Weight 49 kg 107 8 lb 1 80 g m2 20 lb BRIDGE UNIT B538 Paper Size Standard sizes A6 lengthwise to A3 HLT to DLT Non standard sizes Width 100 to 305 mm Length 148 to 432 mm Paper Weight 52 g m2 135 g m2 16 lb 42 lb LCT B543 Paper Size A4 S LT S Paper Weight 60 g m2 105 g m2 16 lb 28 lb Tray Capacity 1...

Page 520: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 521: ...PUNCH UNIT B377 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 522: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 523: ...7 PUNCH UNIT B377 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT 1 2 DETAILS 2 2 1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM 2 2 2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 524: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 525: ...er feed direction use SP6113 Punch Hole Adjustment The punch position can be adjusted by up to 4 mm using combinations of the 3 spacers provided with the finisher To adjust the horizontal position of the holes use the spacers provided with the punch unit 1 Rear cover x 4 2 Punch unit A x 3 x 5 3 Spacers B B377R119 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 526: ...rance sensor B the punch motor turns on and the paper stops The punch clutch C turns and drives the punch heads D The punch HP sensor E detects the home position for the actuator The punch unit switches off when the cut out in the punch shaft disk F enters the punch HP sensor NOTE SP6113 Punch Hole Adjustment adjusts the punch hole position in the sub scan direction for two holes 001 2 Hole or for...

Page 527: ... for the job the punch hole motor A turns on until the actuator disk changes the status of the punch hole switch B until it switches on or off This indicates that the cover C and the punch cam D have moved to one side or the other to determine which punchers are used B377D504 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 528: ...s the hopper sensor B a message will be displayed on the operation panel after the current job is completed This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed When the waste hopper is taken out the arm C moves down and this will actuate the sensor and display a message in the operation panel This message is the same as for the hopper full condition B377D506 WMF C B A CÓPIA NÃO CO...

Page 529: ...1000 SHEET FINISHER B408 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 530: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 531: ...MOTOR 7 2 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 2 1 JAM DETECTION 8 3 SERVICE TABLES 9 3 1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS 9 4 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 10 4 1 GENERAL LAYOUT 10 4 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 11 4 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 13 4 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 15 4 5 JUNCTION GATES 16 Upper Tray Mode 16 Sort Stack Mode 16 Staple Mode 16 4 6 UPPER TRAY 17 4 7 LOWER TRAY UP DOWN MECHANISMS 18 4 8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM 19 4 9 ...

Page 532: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 533: ...r switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section NOTE This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring 1 1 MAIN PCB 1 Rear cover A x 2 2 Main PCB B x 4 All B408R110 WMF B408R109 WMF B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 534: ...per side cover C x 2 4 Front cover support plate D x 1 5 Front cover E 6 Front inner cover F x 2 7 Harness G 8 Unhook the spring H 9 Turn the stapler unit I and take it out 10 Bracket J x 2 B408R102 WMF B408R113 WMF B408R114 WMF A B C D E F G H I J CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 535: ...08 MOTORS SM 3 B408 1 3 MOTORS 1 3 1 SHIFT MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Shift motor A x 2 x 1 1 3 2 STAPLER MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Stapler motor A x 2 x 1 B408R123 WMF B408R124 WMF A A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 536: ...T MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Motor assembly A x 4 x 2 3 Upper transport motor B x 4 4 Exit motor C x 4 1 3 4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Main PCB 1 1 2 Lower transport motor A x 2 x 1 B408R112 WMF B408R111 WMF A B C A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 537: ...EPARATION 1 Front cover and inner cover 1 2 2 Upper side cover A x 2 3 Upper tray B x 1 4 Lower side cover C x 2 5 Loosen the 2 screws D 6 Lower the lower tray guide plate E 7 Guide plate F x 4 B408R116 WMF B408R117 WMF B408R118 WMF A B C D E F CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 538: ...1 4 2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR 1 Stack height sensor assembly A x 1 2 Stack height sensor B x 1 1 4 3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR 1 Stapler tray paper sensor A x 1 B408R121 WMF B408R120 WMF A B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 539: ...8 MOTORS AND SENSORS SM 7 B408 1 4 4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1 Lower tray lift motor A x 2 x 1 1 4 5 STACK FEED OUT MOTOR 1 Stack feed out motor A x 2 x 1 B408R119 WMF B408R122 WMF A A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 540: ... Off check The tray exit sensor does not turn off within the normal time after it turns on Stapler tray entrance sensor On check The stapler tray entrance sensor does not switch on within the normal time after the entrance sensor switched on Stapler tray entrance sensor Off check The staple tray entrance sensor does not turn off within the normal time after it turns on Lower tray exit sensor On ch...

Page 541: ... 1 2 Description 0 0 Normal operation mode Default 1 0 Packing mode Before packing the machine do the following Set switch 1 to 1 then back to zero The lower tray moves to the lowest position Then turn off the main switch After unpacking the machine do the following After turning the main switch back on the lower tray returns to home position automatically CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

Page 542: ...3 Entrance Roller 4 Tray Junction Gate 5 Upper Transport Roller 6 Stapler Junction Gate 7 Lower Transport Rollers 8 Stapler 9 Stack Feed out Belt 10 Positioning Roller 11 Shift Roller 12 Lower Tray 13 Lower Tray Exit Roller B408D101 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 543: ...ray Exit Sensor 9 Lower Tray Upper Limit Switch 10 Shift HP Sensor 11 Shift Motor 12 Jogger Fence HP Sensor 13 Positioning Roller Solenoid 14 Stapler HP Sensor 15 Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor 16 Stapler Tray Paper Sensor 17 Stapler Hammer Motor 18 Staple Sheet Sensor 19 Stack Feed out Belt HP Sensor 20 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor 21 Staple Sensor B408D102 WMF B408D103 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12...

Page 544: ... 24 Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor 25 Stapler Motor 26 Jogger Fence Motor 27 Stack Feed out Motor 28 Main Board 29 Lower Transport Motor 30 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid 31 Exit Motor 32 Upper Transport Motor B408D104 WMF 23 24 25 26 27 28 22 29 30 31 32 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 545: ...Detects when the jogger fence is at home position 12 S4 Shift HP Detects when the shift roller is at home position 10 S5 Stack Feed out Belt HP Detects when the stack feed out belt is at home position 19 S6 Stapler HP Detects when the stapler is at home position 14 S7 Exit Guide Plate HP Detects when the exit guide plate is at home position 5 S8 Stapler Tray Entrance Detects copy paper entering th...

Page 546: ...Lower Tray Upper Limit Detects when the lower tray is at its upper limit position 9 SW2 Front Door Safety Cuts the dc power when the front door is opened 6 SW3 Upper Cover Cuts the dc power when the upper cover is opened 1 PCBs PCB1 Main Controls the finisher and communicates with the copier printer 28 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 547: ...it Motor 2 Upper Transport Motor 3 Lower Transport Motor 4 Shift Motor 5 Exit Guide Plate Motor 6 Lower Tray Lift Motor 7 Stack Feed out Motor 8 Jogger Motor 9 Stapler Motor B408D105 WMF B408D106 WMF B408D107 WMF 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 548: ...pler junction gate solenoid D Upper Tray Mode The tray junction gate solenoid remains off The copies go up to the upper tray Sort Stack Mode The tray junction gate solenoid turns on and the stapler junction gate solenoid remains off The copies are sent to the lower tray directly Staple Mode The tray junction gate solenoid and the stapler junction gate solenoid both turn on The copies go down to th...

Page 549: ... UPPER TRAY SM 17 B408 4 6 UPPER TRAY When the paper limit sensor A switches on during feed out for each of three consecutive sheets of paper paper overflow is detected B408D109 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 550: ...ight sensor F turns off and the tray lifts up Then the tray stops when the sensor turns on again the tray pushes up the feeler If the stack height sensor fails the lower tray upper limit switch G detects the tray and stops the motor This is a safety measure against stack height sensor failure Sort Stack Mode Tray Down Every five sheets of paper the tray goes down until the sensor turns off again T...

Page 551: ...he shift motor turns on driving the shift gear disk and the link D After the paper is delivered to the lower tray E the shift roller moves to its home position which is detected by the shift HP sensor F Then when the trailing edge of the next copy passes the upper transport roller the shift roller shifts again This operation is done every sheet When the trailing edge of each page in the next set o...

Page 552: ...s the copy against the bottom of the stack stopper D For the horizontal paper alignment the jogger front fence E and the rear fence F move to the waiting position which is 18 mm away from the side of the paper When aligning the paper vertically the jogger fence moves in 14 mm from the waiting position After the vertical position has been aligned the jogger fence pushes the paper 4 mm against the r...

Page 553: ... make a gap between the exit rollers This operation is done for all paper sizes but is only needed for the larger sizes The exit guide plate motor B and exit roller release cam C control the exit guide plate movement When the exit guide plate motor starts the cam turns and the exit guide plate moves up When stapling is finished the exit guide plate motor turns on again to close the exit guide plat...

Page 554: ... staple cartridge staple end is indicated on the operation panel The stapler sensor C detects this The stapler rotation HP sensor D checks whether the staple hammer mechanism returns to home position after each stack has been stapled When excessive load is applied to the staple hammer motor the copier detects a staple jam When a staple jam has occurred the jammed staple is inside the staple cartri...

Page 555: ...to the stapling position If two staple position mode is selected the stapler moves to the front stapling position first then moves to the rear stapling position However for the next copy set it staples in the reverse order at the rear side first then at the front side After the job is completed the stapler moves back to its home position The stapler HP sensor B detects this B408D117 WMF A B CÓPIA ...

Page 556: ...The shift roller takes over stack feed out after the leading edge reaches this roller Just before the stapled stack passes through the lower tray exit sensor the stack feed out motor turns off until the shift rollers have completely fed the stack out to the lower tray Then the stack feed out motor turns on again until the pawl B actuates the stack feed out belt home position sensor D B408D118 WMF ...

Page 557: ...BRIDGE UNIT B538 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 558: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 559: ...TIONS 1 1 2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2 1 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 3 1 4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 1 5 DRIVE LAYOUT 4 2 DETAILED DESCRIPTION 5 2 1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM 5 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 6 3 1 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT 6 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 560: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 561: ...VERALL MACHINE INFORMATION 1 1 SPECIFICATIONS Paper Size Standard sizes A6 lengthwise to A3 HLT to DLT Non standard sizes Width 100 to 305 mm Length 148 to 432 mm Paper Weight 52 g m2 135 g m2 16 lb 42 lb CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 562: ... 2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Upper Exit Roller 2 Junction Gate Solenoid 3 Junction Gate 4 1st Transport Roller 5 Relay Sensor 6 2nd Transport Roller 7 Left Exit Roller A688V500 WMF 2 3 1 4 5 6 7 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 563: ...on Index No Motors M1 Cooling Fan Cools the transport unit 4 Sensors S1 Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds 3 S2 Relay Checks for misfeeds 7 Switches SW1 Tray Exit Unit Detects when the tray exit unit is opened 5 SW2 Right Guide Detects when the right guide is opened 2 SW3 Left Guide Detects when the left guide is opened 1 Solenoids SOL1 Junction Gate Moves the junction gate to direct the paper to the u...

Page 564: ...DRIVE LAYOUT B538 4 SM 1 5 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Left Exit Roller 2 2nd Transport Roller 3 Upper Exit Roller 4 1st Transport Roller A688V502 WMF 2 3 4 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 565: ...he junction gate solenoid B When the upper tray is selected the junction gate solenoid turns on and the paper is sent to the upper tray through the upper exit roller C When the left tray or the finisher is selected the junction gate stays off and the paper is sent to the left tray or the finisher through the transport rollers D and the left exit roller A688D500 WMF C B A D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓP...

Page 566: ... 1 Remove the whole unit from the copier 2 Remove the rear upper cover A 1 screw 3 Remove the upper cover unit B 2 screws 2 connectors 4 Remove the exit guide plate C 2 screws 5 Replace the exit sensor D 1 connector A688R500 WMF A688R501 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 567: ...PAPER TRAY UNIT B542 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 568: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 569: ... Feed Unit 6 Lower Paper Feed Unit 6 1 6 PAPER END TRAY LIFT AND RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT 7 Paper End Sensor 7 Tray Lift Sensor 7 Relay Sensor 7 2 SERVICE TABLES 8 2 1 DIP SWITCHES 8 2 2 test points 8 2 3 switches 8 2 4 fuses 8 3 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONs 9 3 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 9 3 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 10 3 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 11 3 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 12 3 5 Pick up and s...

Page 570: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 571: ...8 lb Tray Capacity 500 sheets 80 g m2 20 lb x 2 Paper Feed System FRR Feed and Reverse Roller Paper Height Detection 4 steps 100 70 30 Near end Power Source 24 Vdc 5 Vdc from the copier 120 Vac 115 V version from the copier 220 240 Vac 224 240 V version from the copier Power Consumption 50 W Weight 25 kg Size W x D x H 540 mm x 600 mm x 270 mm CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 572: ...k up Roller 2 Upper Paper Feed Roller 3 Upper Relay Roller 4 Upper Separation Roller 5 Lower Relay Roller 6 Lower Paper Feed Roller 7 Lower Separation Roller 8 Lower Pick up Roller 9 Lower Tray 10 Upper Tray A682V500 WMF 10 9 8 5 6 7 4 3 2 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 573: ...tch 8 Tray Lift Motor 9 Lower Paper Feed Clutch 10 Vertical Guide Switch 11 Lower Lift Sensor 12 Lower Paper End Sensor 13 Lower Relay Sensor 14 Upper Relay Sensor 15 Upper Paper End Sensor 16 Lower Paper Height 2 Sensor 17 Lower Paper Height 1 Sensor 18 Upper Paper Height 2 Sensor 19 Upper Paper Height 1 Sensor A682V501 WMF 8 1 17 16 18 19 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 3 4 5 7 6 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPI...

Page 574: ... Detects misfeeds 13 S7 Upper Paper Height 1 Detects the amount of paper in the upper tray 17 S8 Upper Paper Height 2 Detects the amount of paper in the upper tray 16 S9 Lower Paper Height 1 Detects the amount of paper in the lower tray 19 S10 Lower Paper Height 2 Detects the amount of paper in the lower tray 18 Switches SW1 Upper Tray Informs the copier when the upper tray is set in the machine 2...

Page 575: ...Clutch 4 Lower Paper Feed Clutch 5 Lower Relay Roller 6 Lower Separation Roller 7 Lower Paper Feed Roller 8 Lower Pick up Roller 9 Upper Separation Roller 10 Upper Relay Roller 11 Upper Paper Feed Roller 12 Upper Pick up Roller A682V502 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 576: ...roller B is away from the paper feed roller C and the pick up roller D stays in the upper position When the paper tray is put into the paper tray unit it pushes the release lever E This causes the pick up roller to move down top diagram and the separation roller to move into contact with the paper feed roller bottom diagram A682500 WMF A682D501 WMF E A D A E B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONT...

Page 577: ...is placed in the machine When the machine detects that the paper tray is in the machine the tray lift motor C rotates and the coupling gear D on the tray lift motor engages the pin E on the lift arm shaft F Then the tray lift arm G lifts the tray bottom plate H A682D502 WMF E C A D H F G B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 578: ...activates the lift sensor C to stop the tray lift motor After several paper feed cycles the paper level gradually lowers and the lift sensor is de activated The tray lift motor turns on again until this sensor is activated again When the tray is drawn out of the machine the tray lift motor coupling gear disengages the pin on the lift arm shaft and the tray bottom plate then drops under its own wei...

Page 579: ...er stack and the paper end sensor B is deactivated When the paper tray runs out of paper the paper end feeler drops into the cutout C in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated When the paper tray is drawn out the paper end feeler is lifted up by the pick up roller supporter D A682D503 WMF C D A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 580: ...he amount of 2 paper decreases the bottom plate pressure lever C moves up and the actuator D which is mounted on the same drive shaft as the pressure lever rotates The following combination of sensor signals is sent to the copier Amount of Paper Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper Height Sensor 2 Full OFF ON Near Full ON ON Near End 1 ON OFF Near End 2 OFF OFF A C B D Full Near Full Near End 1 Near End 2 ...

Page 581: ...aper from the tray this is because the machine has no jam detection 2 Set DPS101 for the required free run as shown above 3 Turn the main power switch off wait a few seconds then switch on 4 Press SW101 to start the free run 5 To stop the free run press SW102 3 2 TEST POINTS No Label Monitored Signal TP100 24 V 24 V TP101 GND Ground TP103 TXD TXD to the copier TP104 RXD RXD from the copier TP105 5...

Page 582: ...NT B542 12 SM 4 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 4 1 COVER REPLACEMENT Right Cover 1 Remove the right cover A 2 screws Rear Cover 1 Remove the rear cover B 2 screws A682R500 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 583: ...D SEPARATION AND PICK UP ROLLERS 1 Remove the paper tray Pick up Roller 2 Replace the pick up roller A Paper Feed Roller 2 Replace the paper feed roller B 1 snap ring Separation Roller 2 Replace the separation roller C 1 snap ring A682R501 WMF B C A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 584: ...TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT B542 14 SM 4 3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the tray motor A 1 connector 3 screws A682R502 WMF A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 585: ...er paper feed clutch holder A 2 screws 3 Remove the lower paper feed clutch holder B 2 screws 4 Remove the gear holder C 3 screws 1 spring 1 bearing 5 Replace the relay clutch D 1 connector 6 Replace the upper feed clutch E 1 bushing 1 connector 7 Replace the lower feed clutch F 1 connector A682R503 WMF A D C B E F CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 586: ... 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the upper and lower paper feed clutch holder 3 Remove the gear holder 4 Remove the upper feed clutch A or lower feed clutch B 5 Remove the upper or lower gear C D A682R504 WMF A682R505 WMF C A B D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 587: ...ansport cover B of the copier 1 snap ring 8 Remove the upper paper feed unit C 2 screws 1 connector Lower Paper Feed Unit 6 Remove the docking bracket D 1 screw 7 Remove the vertical transport guide E 2 screws 8 Remove the lower paper feed unit F 2 screws 1 connector A682R507 WMF A682R506 WMF D F E A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 588: ...ENT 1 Remove the paper feed unit Paper End Sensor 2 Replace the paper end sensor A 1 connector Tray Lift Sensor 2 Replace the tray lift sensor B 1 connector Relay Sensor 2 Remove the sensor bracket C 1 screw 3 Replace the relay sensor D 1 connector A682R508 WMF A D B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 589: ...B543 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY RT45 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 590: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 591: ...ons 7 2 3 TRAY UNIT SLIDE MECHANISM 8 3 SERVICE TABLES 9 3 1 DIP SWITCHES 9 3 2 test points 9 3 3 switches 9 3 4 fuses 9 4 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 10 4 1 COVER REPLACEMENT 10 Tray Cover 10 Front Cover 10 Rear Cover 10 Right Lower Cover 10 Upper Cover 10 4 2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT 11 4 2 1 PAPER FEED SEPARATION AND PICK UP rollerS 11 Pick up Roller 11 Paper Feed Roller 11 Separation Roller 11 4 3 TR...

Page 592: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 593: ... sideways LT sideways Paper Weight 60 g m2 105 g m2 16 lb 28 lb Tray Capacity 1500 sheets 80 g m2 20lb Remaining Paper Detection 5 steps 100 75 50 25 Near end Power Source 24 Vdc 5 Vdc from copier Power Consumption 40 W Weight 17 kg Size W x D x H 390 mm x 500 mm x 390 mm CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 594: ...B543 2 SM 1 2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Relay Roller 2 Relay Sensor 3 Paper Feed Roller 4 Pick up Roller 5 Paper End Sensor 6 Paper Tray 7 Separation Roller A683V500 WMF 2 7 3 4 5 1 6 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 595: ...t 1 Sensor 5 Paper Height 2 Sensor 6 Paper Height 3 Sensor 7 Main Board 8 Side Fence Position Sensor 9 Lower Limit Sensor 10 LCT Set Sensor 11 Tray Cover Switch 12 Lift Motor 13 Down Switch 14 Relay Sensor 15 Paper End Sensor 16 Lift Sensor 17 Pick up Solenoid A683V501 WMF 10 6 5 7 4 3 2 1 8 9 12 11 13 14 15 16 17 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 596: ...aper Height 1 Detects the paper height 4 S6 Paper Height 2 Detects the paper height 5 S7 Paper Height 3 Detects the paper height 6 S8 LCT Set Detects whether the LCT is correctly set or not 10 S9 Side Fence Position Detects when the side fence is set at the A4 size position 8 Switches SW1 Tray Cover Stops the LCT lift motor when the tray cover is opened 11 SW2 Down Lowers the LCT bottom plate if p...

Page 597: ...VE LAYOUT 1 Relay Clutch 2 Paper Feed Clutch 3 LCT Motor 4 Tray Bottom Plate 5 Pick up Roller 6 Tray Drive Belts 7 Lift Motor 8 Separation Roller 9 Paper Feed Roller 10 Relay Roller A683V502 WMF 6 4 5 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 598: ...machine uses the FRR Feed and Reverse Roller paper feed system paper feed roller A separation roller B pick up roller C When the start key is pressed the pick up solenoid D energizes and the pick up roller touches the paper A683D500 WMF A D C B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 599: ...closed Just after leaving the energy saving mode Tray lowering conditions In the following conditions the lift motor lowers the tray bottom plate until the lower limit E sensor turns on Just after the paper end sensor turns on Just after the down switch is pressed by the user The amount of the paper in the tray is detected by combination of high low outputs from three sensors paper height sensor 1...

Page 600: ... and the LCT the user releases the lock lever A and can slide the LCT away from the copier to remove the jammed paper When sliding the LCT back into position the LCT is secured against the copier in the correct position by the docking pins B on the LCT A683D502 WMF B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 601: ...ction 2 Set DPS101 for the free run as shown above 3 Turn the main switch off wait a few seconds then switch back on 4 Press SW101 to start the free run 5 To stop the free run press SW102 3 2 TEST POINTS No Label Monitored Signal TP100 24 V 24 V TP101 GND Ground TP103 TXD TXD to the copier TP104 RXD RXD from the copier TP105 5 V 5 V TP106 GND Ground 3 3 SWITCHES No Function SW101 Starts the free r...

Page 602: ...e the front cover B 2 screws Rear Cover 1 Remove the tray cover 2 Remove the cover hinge C 2 screws 3 Remove the rear cover D 3 screws Right Lower Cover 1 Remove the right lower cover E 2 screws Upper Cover 1 Remove the front cover 2 Remove the rear cover 3 Remove the upper cover F A683R500 WMF D F B E A C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 603: ... tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position 2 Open the tray cover Pick up Roller 3 Replace the pick up roller A 1 snap ring Paper Feed Roller 3 Replace the paper feed roller B 1 snap ring Separation Roller 3 Remove the guide plate C 2 screws 4 Replace the separation roller D 1 snap ring A683R501 WMF D C A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 604: ...EPLACEMENT 1 Remove the front and rear cover 2 Remove the upper cover 3 Remove the sensor bracket A 1 screw Tray Lift Sensor 3 Replace the tray lift sensor B 1 connector Paper End Sensor 3 Replace the paper end sensor C 1 connector A683R502 WMF C A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 605: ...LACEMENT SM 13 B543 4 4 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Pull out the LCT 2 Remove the joint guide A 4 screws 3 Remove the sensor bracket B 1 screw 4 Replace the relay sensor C 1 connector A683R503 WMF C A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 606: ...down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position 2 Remove the tray cover 3 Remove the front and rear side fences A B 1 screw each 4 Install the side fences in the correct position A683R504 WMF A4 A B LT A4 LT CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 607: ...1 BIN TRAY B544 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 608: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 609: ...OMPONENT LAYOUT 3 1 4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 4 2 1 BASICS OPERATION 4 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 5 3 1 COVER REMOVAL 5 Front Cover 5 Upper Cover 5 Rear Cover 5 3 2 PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT 6 3 3 ENTRANCE AND PAPER LIMIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT 7 Paper Limit Sensor 7 Entrance Sensor 7 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 610: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 611: ...ATIONS Paper Size A5 lengthwise to A3 HLT to DLT Paper Weight 60 g m2 105 g m2 16 lb 28 lb Tray Capacity 125 sheets 80 g m2 20 lb Power Source 5 Vdc 24 Vdc from copier Power Consumption 15 W Weight 4 kg Size W x D x H 470 mm x 550 mm x 110 mm CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 612: ... SM 1 2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Paper Limit Sensor 2 Exit Roller 3 Entrance Sensor 4 Entrance Roller 5 Paper Sensor 6 Paper Tray 7 Tray Motor B376V500 WMF B376V501 WMF 2 6 4 7 6 3 4 5 1 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 613: ...trance and exit rollers 3 Sensors S1 Entrance Checks for misfeeds 7 S2 Paper Limit Detects the paper stack limit in the tray 5 S3 Paper Detects whether there is paper in the tray 6 S4 Motor Lock Detects whether the tray motor is turning 1 Switches SW1 Right Cover Detects whether the right cover is opened 4 PCBs PCB1 Main Controls the 1 bin tray and communicates with the copier 2 LEDs LED1 Paper In...

Page 614: ...le the tray motor is on the copier will stop and display an SC code The paper sensor D checks whether there is paper in the tray or not The paper sensor turns on when paper is stacked in the tray and the paper indicator is turned on The paper limit sensor E detects when the tray is full While a sheet of copy paper is passing this sensor the sensor feeler is always pushed up by the paper When the p...

Page 615: ...Cover 1 Remove the scanner unit if it is at the front 2 Remove the front cover A 1 screw Upper Cover 1 Remove the scanner unit 2 Remove the upper cover B 2 screws Rear Cover 1 Remove the scanner unit 2 Remove the rear cover C 2 screws B376R500 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 616: ...REPLACEMENT B544 6 SM 3 2 PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Remove the front cover 2 Remove the exit guide plate A 1 screw 3 Replace the paper sensor B 1 connector B376R501 WMF B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 617: ...LIMIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Remove the front and upper covers Paper Limit Sensor 2 Replace the paper limit sensor A 1 connector Entrance Sensor 2 Remove the sensor bracket B 1 screw 1 spring 3 Replace the entrance sensor C 1 connector B376R502 WMF C B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 618: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 619: ...TWO TRAY FINISHER B545 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 620: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 621: ...N HP SENSOR 9 1 14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR 10 1 14 1 TRAY 1 COVERS 10 tray Shift Sensors and tray release sensor 11 1 14 3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR 11 1 14 4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH 11 1 15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD 12 1 16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT 12 2 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 2 1 TIMING CHARTS 13 2 1 1 A4 S LT S SHIFT MODE WITH PUNCH TRAY 1 13 2 1 2 A4 S LT S SHIFT MODE WITH PUNCH TRAY 2 14 2 1 3 A4 S LT S STAPLE MO...

Page 622: ...ECHANISM 28 4 6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM 29 Vertical Paper Alignment 29 Horizontal Paper Alignment 29 4 7 STAPLER MECHANISM 30 4 7 1 STAPLER MOVEMENT 30 Stapler Rotation 30 Side to Side Movement 30 4 7 2 STAPLER 31 4 7 3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT 32 4 8 PUNCH UNIT OPTIONAL 33 4 8 1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM 33 4 8 2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION 34 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 623: ...L COVERS 1 Top cover A x4 If the shift tray below is blocking the screw hole remove the shift tray 2 Bracket B x1 3 Front door C 4 Rear cover D x4 1 1 2 INNER COVER 1 Front cover 1 1 1 2 Inner cover A x3 tabs B x3 B352R101 WMF B352R102 WMF A B C D A B B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 624: ...ROLLER 1 Open the front door 2 Positioning roller A x1 3 Belt B 1 3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR 1 Top cover 1 1 1 2 Open transport door A 3 Bracket B x1 x1 4 Tray 1 exit sensor C B352R103 WMF B352R104 WMF A B A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 625: ...3 Stapler tray entrance sensor bracket C x1 x1 4 Stapler tray entrance sensor D 1 5 STAPLER TRAY 1 External covers front door inner cover 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 Two clamps A 3 Harnesses B x8 4 Stapler tray C x2 D x2 E At the front of the finisher pull the stapler tray toward you and lift it out B352R105 WMF B352R107 WMF B352R106 WMF A B C D A B D C E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 626: ...tray and then support it with your hand as it descends 3 Place one hand under tray 1 the upper tray press in on the gear B to release the tray and then support it with your hand as it descends 4 Tray 1 back fence C x4 5 Sensor stay D x2 x4 6 Plastic bracket E x1 7 Stack height sensors F 8 Metal bracket G x1 9 Upper limit switch H B352R201 WMF B352R109 WMF B352R110 WMF B A C D E F G H CÓPIA NÃO CON...

Page 627: ...Tray 1 back fence 1 6 2 Exit guide plate motor A x2 x1 Disengage the shaft of the exit guide plate motor from the ring 1 8 LIFT MOTORS 1 Top cover and rear cover 1 1 1 2 Tray 1 back fence A 1 6 3 Sensor stay B x4 B352R111 WMF B352R203 WMF A A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 628: ...LIFT MOTORS B545 6 SM 4 Motor bracket C x3 x 2 5 Tray 1 lift motor D x2 drive belt 6 Tray 2 lift motor E x2 drive belt B352R204 WMF B352R205 WMF C D E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 629: ...vers 1 1 2 Exit guide plate motor 1 7 3 Guide plate A x1 Pull the shaft toward you through the round hole 4 Guide plate exit assembly B x1 x1 5 Anti static brush C x2 6 Bracket guide exit D x2 7 Lower exit sensor E x1 x1 B352R112 WMF B352R113 WMF B352R114 WMF A B C D E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 630: ...ay 1 5 2 Sensor bracket A x1 x2 3 Bracket B x1 4 Feeler C 5 Lower stack height sensors D 1 11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR 1 Stapler tray 1 5 2 Sensor bracket A x1 x1 3 Tray 2 position shunt sensor B x1 B352R116 WMF B351R202 WMF A B C D A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 631: ...ne hand as you remove the stapler Do not twist or rotate the stapler bracket as you remove it 1 13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR 1 Stapler unit 1 12 2 Carefully rotate the stapler holder A 3 Stapler cover B x1 4 Sensor bracket C x1 x1 5 Stapler rotation HP sensor D B352R117 WMF B352R118 WMF A B B A C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 632: ... 1 14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR 1 14 1 TRAY 1 COVERS 1 Tray 1 A x1 2 Rear tray cover B x1 3 Front tray cover C x1 4 Bottom tray cover D x2 5 Bottom bracket E x3 B352R207 WMF B352R208 WMF A B C D E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 633: ...Tray shift sensors B x1 each 4 Tray release sensor C x1 1 14 3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR 1 Tray 1 covers 1 14 1 2 Motor bracket A x3 x1 3 Tray 1 shift motor B x3 belt x1 1 14 4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH 1 Tray 1 covers 1 14 1 2 Back fence lock clutch A x1 x1 B352R210 WMF B352R209 WMF B352R211 WMF A C A B B B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 634: ...e paper feed direction use the appropriate SP mode To adjust the horizontal position of the holes use the spacers provided with the punch unit 1 Rear cover 1 1 1 2 Punch unit A x3 x5 3 Spacers B The punch position can be adjusted by up to 4 mm using combinations of the 3 spacers provided with the finisher B352R206 WMF B352R119 WMF A B A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 635: ...r Exit Sensor Entrance Motor Upper Transport Motor Exit Motor Punch Motor Punch Clutch Punch H P Sensor Tray 1 Shift Motor Tray 1 Shift Sensor Jam Detection 0 1 ON OFF 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0 1579 3157 467 2046 3624 109 576 1688 2155 3266 3733 1166 1633 2645 3112 4223 4690 500 ms 131 ms 155 ms 1250 ms 34 pulse 700 ms 66 pulse 1353 ms 34 puls...

Page 636: ...otor Punch Motor Punch Clutch Punch H P Sensor Tray 2 Shift Motor Tray 2 Shift Sensor Jam Detection 0 1 ON OFF 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0 500 ms 155 ms 1250 ms 66 pulse 1353 ms 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 1579 3157 467 2046 3624 109 576 1054 1521 1688 2155 2633 3100 3266 3774 4200 4667 131 ms 34 pulse 700 ms 34 pulse 700 ms 399 pulse 2 s Low B35...

Page 637: ...ack Feed out H P Sensor OFF 0 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 20000 1579 3157 4736 6314 7893 109 576 1688 2155 3266 3733 4845 5312 6423 6890 8002 8469 1525 1772 3104 3351 4682 4929 7839 8086 9418 9665 6332 11068 11353 12056 87668816 15286 6617 7320 131 ms 155 ms 156 ms 245 pulse 761 ms 1348 2927 4505 186 pulse 459 ms 484 pulse 1194 ms 5304 6039 7662 9241 7765 1892 120 ms 435 pulse 1073 ms 1932 2252 22...

Page 638: ...ithin 66 pulse after the tray exit sensor turns on 9 Stapler tray entrance sensor On check The stapler tray entrance sensor does not switch on within 102 pulses after the entrance sensor switched off 1 9 Stapler tray entrance sensor Off check The staple tray entrance sensor does not turn off within 34 pulse after the stapler tray entrance sensor turns on 1 9 Lower tray exit sensor On check The low...

Page 639: ...shift trays for shipping on the finisher main board set DIP SW4 ON cycle the main machine power off and on then set DIP SW4 OFF The shift trays move automatically to the shipping position After unpacking the machine again and switching on turn all DIP switches off to put the machine into factory default mode 3 2 TEST POINTS No Label Monitored Signal TP101 GND Ground TP102 5V 5V TP103 RXD Received ...

Page 640: ... S only in the staple mode the first sheet of the second copy waits here for the next sheet to feed while the previous stack is stapled After the second copy is fed the first and second sheets are fed together to the pre stack tray This delay allows enough time for the previous stack to be stapled without interrupting paper feed Shift trays Tray 1 upper and tray 2 lower shift side to side in the s...

Page 641: ... guide plate motor 7 Lower exit roller 8 Tray 2 shift motor 9 Exit motor 10 Lower transport motor 11 Pre stack motor 12 Upper transport motor 13 Punch motor 14 Entrance motor 15 Stack feed out motor 16 Jogger motor 17 Stapler motor 18 Stapler rotation motor B352D104 WMF B352D103 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 642: ...y 1 is at the upper exit for sort stack mode In sort stack mode for tray 2 both the tray junction gate solenoid A and stapler junction gate solenoid B are off and copies go to the lower exit In staple mode the tray junction solenoid A is off and the stapler junction gate solenoid B is on and copies go to the stapler tray B302D506 WMF B302D505 WMF B302D507 WMF A B A A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA N...

Page 643: ...is delivered to tray 1 the shift motor turns on driving the gear disk and the arm E and the tray drive unit moves to one side Two shift sensors F detect when to stop this side to side movement There is a cut out in the gear disk The shift tray moves in one direction until one of the shift sensors detects the cut out Then the shift tray stops The next set of prints is then delivered and the gear di...

Page 644: ...tray 2 shift motor B turns on the arm D moves the entire end fence C from side to side not just the tray After the gear disk has turned 180 degrees the cut out in the gear disk enters the tray half turn sensor E and the motor stops When the next set of prints is delivered the motor turns on again and moves the tray back to its previous position B352D105 WMF A B D C E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO...

Page 645: ...sor 2 E is actuated the tray 1 lift motor lowers the tray for a specified time When the tray lowers during printing the actuator F will pass through the tray 1 overflow sensor G When the actuator drops below the sensor to deactivate the sensor the machine detects that the paper stack height has exceeded a certain limit The upper limit switch for tray 1 H prevents the drive gear from being damaged ...

Page 646: ...activated When tray 1 is moved down to the lower exit tray 2 must be moved down out of the way So tray 2 E is also lowered until the tray 2 shunt position sensor F detects tray 2 or the top of the paper stack in tray 2 The method of paper height detection is the same as for the upper exit area When the tray lowers during printing the actuator will enter the tray 1 overflow 2 sensor G When this hap...

Page 647: ...ushing against the plate D in towards the finisher However the plate is fixed so the tray moves out away from the finisher Then the tray 1 shift motor stops then the tray 1 lift motor lowers tray 1 When the tray 1 lower limit sensor is activated as described on the previous page the tray has moved past the sensors at the lower exit The tray 1 shift motor turns on again until the gear disk activate...

Page 648: ...ion Before tray 1 goes back to the upper exit area the tray lock solenoid F turns off to unlock the tray In addition the back fence lock clutch H turns on to hold the back fence I This prevents the springs inside the back fence from suddenly contracting these springs normally keep the tray steady during side to side shift Then tray 1 is released and it moves up to the upper exit area B352D203 WMF ...

Page 649: ... is on see Normal Mode in the above diagram In the multi tray staple mode selected by the service technician the machine detects that the paper stack height has exceeded the overflow limit when the actuator E enters the tray 2 overflow 1 sensor D The lower limit sensor G for tray 2 detects when tray 2 is at its lowest limit and stops the tray 2 lift motor The function of the tray 2 upper limit swi...

Page 650: ...nsor This directs the sheet to the pre stack tray B The pre stack feed roller C stops for a specified time after the trailing edge of the paper has passed through the entrance sensor and stops the paper from leaving the pre stack tray At the same time the pre stack junction gate solenoid switches off and the second sheet is sent to the paper guide D The pre stack feed roller controlled by the pre ...

Page 651: ...per The positioning roller rotates to push the paper back and align the trailing edge of the paper against the stack stopper D Horizontal Paper Alignment When the start key is pressed the jogger motor E turns on and the jogger fences F move to the waiting position which is 8 mm wider on both sides than the selected paper When the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor t...

Page 652: ...er 45 degrees clockwise at the stapling position before the stapler fires Side to Side Movement The stapler motor D moves the stapler from side to side After the start key is pressed the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position The amount of movement required to reach the stapling position is determined by the size of the selected paper If the two staple mode is selected the s...

Page 653: ...is not installed or after the stapler cassette runs out of staples a message is displayed in the operation panel If this condition is detected during a print job the indicator will appear but the print job will not stop The staple position sensor D detects if there is a staple sheet at the stapling position After a new staple cartridge is installed the staple hammer motor turns on to transfer the ...

Page 654: ... to the tray G The exit guide plate closes at a specified interval after the stapled prints have started to feed out Then the exit roller takes over the stack feed out The stack feed out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed out belt home position sensor H When tray 1 is passing this area on its way back up to the upper exit the exit guide safety switch I cuts power to the tray lif...

Page 655: ...or B the punch motor turns on and the paper stops Then the punch clutch C turns on to make the punch holes The home position is detected by the punch HP sensor D When the cut out in the punch shaft disk E enters the punch HP sensor the punch clutch turns off When the finisher has received the command that changes the number of punch holes the punch hole motor F turns on until the disk changes the ...

Page 656: ...s the hopper sensor B a message will be displayed on the operation panel after the current job is completed This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed When the waste hopper is taken out the arm C moves down and this will actuate the sensor and display a message in the operation panel This message is the same as for the hopper full condition B352D117 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CO...

Page 657: ...BOOKLET FINISHER B546 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 658: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 659: ...position Stapling 7 2 6 STAPLER 8 2 7 SHIFT TRAY MECHANISM 9 2 8 BOOKLET UNIT GATE MECHANISM 10 2 9 RELAY ROLLER AND POSITIONING PLATE MECHANISM 12 2 10 POSITIONING ROLLER MECHANISM 13 2 11 BOOKLET UNIT JOGGER MOVEMENT MECHANISM 14 2 12 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT 15 2 13 PAPER FOLDER MECHANISM 16 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 18 3 1 REMOVAL 18 3 1 1 UPPER DOOR 18 3 1 2 UPPER REAR COVER 19 3 1 3 LOWER REA...

Page 660: ...UNIT 34 Removal 34 Adjustment 35 3 1 17 BOOKLET BOARD 37 3 1 18 POSITIONING PLATE UNIT 37 3 1 19 1ST AND 2ND BOOKLET UNIT GATES 38 3 2 ADJUSTMENT 39 3 2 1 SHIFT TRAY HEIGHT 39 3 2 2 JOGGER FENCE POSITION 40 3 2 3 STAPLING POSITION 41 3 2 4 BOOKLET STAPLING POSITION 42 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 661: ...r Roller Entrance Gate 11 Booklet Gate 12 1st Transport Roller 13 Stapler Unit 14 Transport Belt 15 Booklet Unit Entrance Roller 16 1st Booklet Unit Gate 17 2nd Booklet Unit Gate 18 Anvil 19 Folder Plate 20 Positioning Plate 21 Shutter Guide 22 Booklet Tray 23 Exit Guide 24 Positioning Roller 25 Folder Roller 26 Relay Roller 27 Booklet Stapler Unit B546V500 WMF B546V501 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 9 11 10...

Page 662: ...are closed and the copy paper goes directly to the shift tray C Longer than A4 sideways The booklet gate proof tray gate D and buffer roller exit gate E are closed and the buffer roller entrance gate is opened The copy paper passes through the buffer roller F This paper path creates a distance between copies B546D564 PCX B546D565 PCX A B C D E F CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 663: ...te A is closed The buffer roller entrance gate B and proof tray gate C are opened The copy paper goes to the proof tray D 2 1 3 BOOKLET STITCH MODE The booklet gate is opened and the copy paper goes to the booklet unit B546D101 WMF B546D102 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 664: ...being stapled It only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi set copy job The buffer roller entrance gate A and buffer roller exit gate B are opened Then the 1st sheet of paper goes around the buffer roller C When the 2nd copy D comes to the buffer roller the buffer roller exit gate is closed The two sheets of paper go to the shift tray E or staple tray F B546D566 PCX B546D567 PCX ...

Page 665: ... the upper exit roller opens The paper switches back to the stopper C Then the front guide release solenoid D turns on and the front guide E is released the shift motor moves jogger fence F to the front and the copy paper shifts to the front by 30 mm After copy paper has been shifted the upper exit guide closes and the lower exit roller G turns in the opposite direction to feed out the copy paper ...

Page 666: ...elt E and it is aligned the by jogger motor The feed belt solenoid F turns on to move the feed belt to the stopper This function prevents excessive buckling of the paper between belt and stopper The paddles G send the paper to the stopper starting from the 2nd copy paper When the trailing edge of the 2nd copy paper passes the 2nd transport roller the paddle solenoid H turns on and the drive from t...

Page 667: ...e stapler unit moves to the front or rear stapling position when the copy paper comes into the finisher and stays until the copy job finishes It returns to home position when the job is finished Two position Stapling When the print key is pressed the stapler unit moves to the center The stapler unit moves to the rear stapling position first and moves to the front stapling position when stapling Th...

Page 668: ...oller moves to the highest position on the cam the copy paper is stapled The stapler unit contains the cartridge set switch E staple end switch F and staple position sensor G The staple position sensor detects whether the staple sheet has come to the staple unit or not B546D571 PCX B546D110 WMF B546D109 WMF A B C D H A E F G CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 669: ...sors 1 D and 2 E The lift motor contains a thermoswitch F When it detects 73 5º C the finisher board stops the lift motor until its temperature reaches approximately 40º C The shutter position switch G cuts the lift motor power for safety when the upper exit guide plate opens The shift tray height sensor H detects the distance between the sensor and the top of the copy paper on the shift tray B546...

Page 670: ...ized to close the gate s in order to transport paper to the positioning plate D through a suitable paper path This is done for the following reasons To detect the trailing edge of paper with the correct sensor To prevent the leading edge of the next sheet from hitting the trailing edge of the previous sheets on the positioning plate B546D550 PCX B546D551 PCX B546D552 PCX B546D563 PCX A B D A C CÓP...

Page 671: ...olenoids sensors A3 11 x 17 B4 11 x 14 A4 81 2 x 11 1st Solenoid Gate OFF Opened ON Closed ON Closed 2nd Solenoid Gate OFF Opened OFF Opened ON Closed A3 11 x 17 B4 11 x 14 A4 81 2 x 11 Trailing Edge Sensor 1 ON ON ON Trailing Edge Sensor 2 OFF ON ON Trailing Edge Sensor 3 OFF OFF ON CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 672: ...ning plate B When the trailing edge of the paper comes to the trailing edge sensor that the paper passes last the relay roller solenoid is de energized This solenoid on off cycle is done for each sheet of paper Before paper comes the positioning plate moves up from the home position to a position that is suitable for the selected paper size in order that the middle of the paper just comes to the s...

Page 673: ...ller is not round but elliptical in shape so that it moves away from the paper while the paper is being horizontally aligned The positioning roller sensor C detects the actuator D on the roller shaft to determine the rotation of the positioning roller When the sensor is de actuated the roller is away from the paper and the jogger fences E start moving B546D555 PCX B546D554 PCX A D E B C D E A C CÓ...

Page 674: ... the paper side edges Each time a sheet of paper reaches the positioning plate B the jogger fences move toward the paper to align the paper once The fences move back a short distance and move forward again the paper to align for the second time Then the fences go back to the waiting position When the last sheet is aligned the fences stay at the aligning positions during stapling B546D557 PCX A B C...

Page 675: ...his is for the following reasons To prevent paper from becoming waved in the area between the two stapled positions To minimize necessary electric power The staple hammer HP switch in each stapler detects a stapling cycle and the staple end sensor detects the presence of staples in the cartridge The stapler unit including the two staplers can be pulled out to enable staple cartridge replacement or...

Page 676: ...positioning plate from being caught by the rollers down to the home position Shortly after that the folder plate motor and the folder roller motor start rotating The folder plate A moves to push the middle of the stapled sheets of paper toward the folder rollers B until the folder plate return sensor C is de actuated Then the folder plate comes back to the home position After that the folder rolle...

Page 677: ...e firmly When the leading edge of the folded paper passes 20 mm from the folder rollers the folder roller motor reverses to feed the paper back 20 mm During this action the folder plate stays at the return position Then the folder roller motor rotates forward again to feed the set of papers out and the folder plate goes back to the home position CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 678: ...18 SM 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3 1 REMOVAL 3 1 1 UPPER DOOR 1 Open the upper door A 2 Remove the lower hinge B x1 3 Push up the upper door and remove it B546R579 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 679: ... UPPER REAR COVER 1 Hold up the proof tray and open the top cover A 2 Unhook the upper rear cover B and remove it x3 3 1 3 LOWER REAR COVER 1 Remove the lower rear cover C x4 B546R580 PCX B546R104 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 680: ... tray A and open the top cover B 2 Push the hooks C of the top cover and remove it 3 1 5 UPPER INNER COVER 1 Open the upper door 2 Remove the upper inner cover A x 1 B546R581 PCX B546R580 PCX B546R582 PCX B C A A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 681: ... B x 1 3 Unhook the two stoppers C and remove them 4 Remove the slide guide D by pulling it up 5 Remove the shift tray unit E by pulling it up NOTE When reinstalling the shift tray unit release the clutch gear F of the tray lift motor by carefully inserting a screwdriver B546R106 WMF B546R107 WMF B546R108 WMF A B E C D F CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 682: ...releasing the clutch gear of the tray lift motor see Shift Tray Unit Removal 2 Remove the upper shift guide A x 6 5 x M4 1 x M3 3 1 8 LOWER SHIFT GUIDE 1 Remove the shift tray unit 2 Remove the lower shift guide A x 2 x 6 3 x M4 3 x M3 B546R112 WMF B546R109 WMF A A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 683: ...move the screw B that secures the transport belt unit C 3 Disconnect D x4 4 Hold up the exit unit E and remove it with the transport belt unit x 3 1 clamp NOTE When installing the exit unit make sure to position the exit unit guide plate black F over the transport guide plate G B546R113 WMF B546R114 WMF A B C E D F G CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 684: ... the top cover 2 Disconnect the connector A 3 Remove the upper shift guide B x 6 and the guide holder C x 2 4 Unhook the shafts D and remove the buffer roller unit E 2 clamps B546R583 PCX B546R112 WMF B546R585 PCX B546R584 PCX A D B C D E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 685: ...3 1 11 STAPLER 1 Open the upper front door 2 Slide the stapler A towards the front 3 Remove the stapler x 1 x 1 B 4 Remove the cover C from the stapler x 2 B546R586 PCX B546R587 PCX B546R588 PCX A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 686: ...9 3 Do the following adjustments after replacing the board Shift tray height Jogger fence position Stapling position 4 If you need to release the setting for the maximum number of stacks allowed on the shift tray in the staple mode set DIP S3 No 5 to ON B546R589 PCX A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 687: ...ollowing items Upper and lower rear covers Shift tray unit Lower shift guide 2 Remove the lower right cover A x 4 3 Remove the folder roller knob B x 1 stepped 4 Remove the lower inner cover C and lower door D x 5 B546R561 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 688: ...guide C and remove it 1 L pin D x 2 E 7 Remove the right front and right rear covers F G x 2 ea 8 Disconnect the two connectors H 9 Remove the two joints I and then pull out the booklet unit J from the right side x 3 B546R110 WMF B546R101 WMF B546R111 WMF A B C D E F G H I J I CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 689: ...546 3 1 14 FOLDER ROLLERS 1 Remove the booklet unit 2 Remove the drive unit A x 4 B x 3 C 3 Remove the front and rear tension springs D B546R590 PCX B546R593 PCX B546R591 PCX B546R592 PCX A D D B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 690: ... Remove the gears A and ball bearings B 4 C rings 5 Remove the front and rear tighteners C x 1 stepped ea B546R593 PCX B546R595 PCX B546R596 PCX B546R597 PCX B546R598 PCX A B B C C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 691: ...MOVAL SM 31 B546 Booklet Finisher B546 6 Remove the jogger plates A x 1 ea 7 Slide the folder rollers B to the front and remove them B546R599 PCX B546R549 PCX A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 692: ...ooklet board 2 Release the harness A from the clamps 3 Insert two positioning screws B in the holes provided in the folder table C 4 Tighten the screws until the ends touch the securing plate D for the folder plate 5 Remove the folder plate E and the securing plate x 3 B546R117 WMF B546R116 WMF B C D A D E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 693: ... along the line where they meet see the illustration NOTE 1 Be sure to fold the two strips back toward you so that they can easily be removed 2 Be careful not to attach the tape too close to the three screw holes 3 Reattach the two plates A B to the folder table D x 3 NOTE Tighten these three screws while holding the securing plate against the two positioning screws E that were installed in step 3...

Page 694: ...OOKLET STAPLER UNIT Removal 1 Remove the lower door and inner cover 2 Remove the guide roller A and shaft B 1 E ring 3 Pull out the booklet stapler unit C B546R562 PCX B546R563 PCX A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 695: ...er B546 Adjustment 1 Remove the booklet stapler cover A x 3 2 Remove the three paper guides B x 1 ea 3 Loosen the two screws on each of the anvils C B546R564 PCX B546R565 PCX B546R567 PCX A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 696: ...B NOTE The anvil positioning plate is stored in the booklet stapler cover C 5 Rotate the gear to move down the stapler Then align the anvil positioning plate and the anvil D Then secure the anvils x 2 ea B546R568 PCX B546R569 PCX B546R570 PCX A B A C A D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 697: ...he booklet board B x 4 x 14 NOTE After replacing the board adjust the booklet stapling position 3 1 18 POSITIONING PLATE UNIT 1 Remove the booklet board x 4 x 14 2 Slide the paper positioning unit C to the right and remove it x 2 x 2 D B546R115 WMF B546R571 PCX A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 698: ...rs 2 Release the two tension springs A of the booklet entrance guide B 3 Remove the booklet unit gate solenoids C x 1 1 spring each 4 Pull out the link of the solenoid D 5 Remove the booklet unit gates E B546R572 PCX B546R573 PCX B546R574 PCX A B A C D E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 699: ...er board The finisher automatically adjusts the shift tray height when switch 1 is pressed After performing the adjustment the shift tray will return to home position During the adjustment LED 1 flashes After performing the adjustment LED 1 turns on and remains on If the automatic adjustment fails the finisher stops and LED 1 turns off 5 Turn off dip switches 3 1 and 4 then turn off the copier mai...

Page 700: ...he A4 or 81 2 x 11 position 4 Place 10 sheets of A4 81 2 x 11 paper between the jogger fences and push them until they touch the shutters 5 Adjust the jogger fence position by pressing switch 1 or 2 Switch 1 Move to the front 0 35 mm press Switch 2 Move to the rear 0 35 mm press 6 Press switches 1 and 2 simultaneously to store the adjustment data After pressing the switches the upper exit unit wil...

Page 701: ...t touches the shutter When the staple tray paper sensor detects the paper the stapler will staple rear 1 point 5 Take out the stapled paper manually and check the staple position Staple position Good Turn off dip switches 3 1 and 2 to end the procedure Staple position No good Change the staple position by doing the following steps 6 Adjust the staple position by pressing switch 1 or 2 Switch 1 Mov...

Page 702: ...f the booklet entrance guide sensor S42 and the booklet entrance guide safety switch SW11 so that S42 and SW11 remain actuated 4 Press switch 2 SW2 on the booklet board After pressing the switch the booklet transport motor M10 will start to rotate 5 Put a mark on the trailing edge of some A3 11 x 17 paper two sheets SW2 Dip Switch 1 LED 1 B546R557 WMF 1 Dip Switch 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 4 ON B546R556 WMF M...

Page 703: ...et entrance guide A then slide in the two sheets of paper B until their leading edges touch the positioning plate 7 Press switch 2 on the booklet board The booklet finisher makes a booklet automatically B546R548 PCX A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 704: ...pling position 1 mm towards the leading edge If dip switch 1 is currently set to 2 set the dip switch to reflect 2 this moves the stapling position 4 steps towards the leading edge Example 2 To move the stapling position 0 75 mm away from the leading edge If dip switch 1 is currently set to 1 set the dip switch to reflect 2 this move s the stapling position 3 steps away from the leading edge 10 Tu...

Page 705: ...AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B714 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 706: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 707: ...D 9 1 14 CONTROLLER BOARD 9 2 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 2 1 TIMING CHARTS 10 2 1 1 A4 S LT S SINGLE SIDED ORIGINAL MODE 10 2 1 2 A4 S LT S DOUBLE SIDED ORIGINAL MODE 11 2 2 JAM DETECTION 12 3 SERVICE TABLES 13 3 1 DIP SWITCHES 13 3 2 TEST POINTS 13 3 3 FUSES 13 4 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 14 4 1 MAIN COMPONENTS 14 4 2 DRIVE LAYOUT 15 4 3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION 16 4 3 1 BASIC MECHANISM 16 4 3 2 MIXED ORIGINA...

Page 708: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 709: ...t Velcro pads F Original exit tray x 2 Slide to the right and then pull out CAUTION The hinge of the ARDF is spring loaded and becomes much lighter with all the covers removed After removing all the covers lay a heavy book on the front right corner of the ARDF to prevent it from springing up unexpectedly B597R111 WMF B597R110 WMF D E F C A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 710: ...D UNIT Open the top cover A Original feed unit Press it toward you on its shaft to release and lift out 1 3 ORIGINAL PICK UP ROLLER Original feed unit 1 2 A Pick up roller x 1 B597R101 WMF B597R102 WMF A A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 711: ... roller 1 2 1 3 A Shaft x 1 NOTE Before removing the shaft note carefully the positioning of the spring B This must be reset during re installation C Feed belt cover Timing belt gear shaft springs x 2 NOTE Do not lose the springs D Original feed belt B597R104 WMF B597R103 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 712: ...EGISTRATION ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS Open the top cover A Upper original guide x 3 B Skew correction sensor x 1 C Interval sensor x 1 D Registration sensor x 1 E Original width sensor bracket x 1 x 4 F Original width sensors B597R106 WMF B597R105 WMF A B C D E F CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 713: ...S Raise the original table A Lower cover of original tray x 4 B Original length sensor 1 x 1 C Original length sensor 2 x 1 1 7 SEPARATION ROLLER Original feed unit 1 2 A Separation roller cover B Separation roller x 1 B597R107 WMF B597R108 WMF A B A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 714: ...al tray before you re install the paper feed guide Separation roller torque limiter x 1 1 7 C Bracket x 1 x 1 D Inverter sensor x 1 E Original set sensor x 1 1 9 PICK UP MOTOR ORIGINAL STOPPER HP SENSOR PICK UP HP SENSOR Rear cover 1 1 A Pick up motor x 1 x 2 Timing belt B Sensor bracket x 2 x 1 C Pick up HP sensor D Original stopper HP sensor B597R109 WMF B597R114 WMF A B C D E A B C D CÓPIA NÃO ...

Page 715: ...der B714 1 10 TRANSPORT MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR Rear cover 1 1 A Pick up roller assembly x 1 x 3 x 3 B Motor bracket x 3 x 2 Timing belt x 2 C Transport motor x 2 Spring x 1 D Inverter motor x 2 B597R113 WMF B597R112 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 716: ...LUTCH B714 8 SM 1 11 FEED MOTOR SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH Rear cover 1 1 A Motor bracket x 5 x 1 B Feed motor x 2 C Clutch stopper x 1 D Skew correction roller clutch x 1 B597R115 WMF A B C D CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 717: ...t guide plate C Exit guide plate cover x 2 D Exit sensor x 1 x 1 1 13 STAMP SOLENOID Rear cover 1 1 Open exit guide plate 1 12 A Exit guide plate cover x 1 B Stamp solenoid x 1 x 1 1 14 CONTROLLER BOARD Rear cover 1 1 A Controller board x 4 all B597R116 WMF B597R201 WMF B597R202 WMF A B C D A A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 718: ...ON OFF Original Set Sensor Pick up Motor Original Stopper H P Sn Original Pick up H P Sn Feed Motor Feed Clutch Skew Correction Sn Interval Sn Registration Sn Transport Motor DF Gate Exit Sn Inverter Motor 1600 pps 1600 pps 6800 pps 4385 pps 3433 pps 8268 pps JAM1 JAM2 JAM3 JAM4 JAM5 JAM6 JAM7 ms CCW OFF CW 3979 pps 1600 pps 1000 1500 0 500 2000 1000 1500 B597T900 WMF CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃ...

Page 719: ...F OFF CW ON OFF ON OFF Pick up Motor Original Stopper H P Sn Original Pick up H P Sn Feed Motor Feed Clutch Skew Correction Sn Interval Sn Transport Motor Registration Sn DF Gate Exit Sn Inverter Motor Inverter Sol Inverter Sn 1600 pps 1600 pps 6800 pps 4385 pps 3433 pps 8268 pps 2322 pps 73 mm 5138 pps JAM9 JAM8 CCW OFF CW CCW 73 mm 3000 3500 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 1600 pps 3979 pps B597T901 W...

Page 720: ...d motor has fed the original 185 mm Transport jam Jam 4 The interval sensor does not turn on after the feed motor has fed the original 141 mm Registration sensor Jam 5 The registration sensor does not turn on after the interval sensor turned on and the original has been fed 117 mm Exit jam Jam 6 The exit sensor does not turn on after the transport motor has fed the original 124 mm Exit jam Jam 7 T...

Page 721: ...se 1 0 0 0 Free run one sided original 100 color mode 1 0 0 1 Free run one sided original 200 color mode 1 0 1 0 Free run one sided original 32 color mode 1 0 1 1 Free run one sided original 100 b w mode 1 1 0 0 Free run two sided original 100 color mode 1 1 0 1 Free run two sided original 100 b w mode 1 1 1 0 Free run one sided fax mode 48 b w mode 1 1 1 1 Free run one sided mixed original size m...

Page 722: ...n roller 9 Exit roller 18 Feed belt Pick up Mechanism Picks up the originals for scanning Feed Separation Mechanism Comprised of the feed belt and separation roller feeds and separates the originals and corrects skew Original Size Detection Sensors Comprised of 4 width sensors and 2 length sensors detect the sizes of the originals Original Transport Mechanism Comprised of the transport roller ADF ...

Page 723: ...OUT 1 Feed motor 7 Inverter roller 2 Feed belt 8 Exit roller 3 Pick up roller 9 Separation roller 4 Pick up motor 10 Transport roller 5 Transport motor 11 Skew correction roller 6 Inverter motor B597D102 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 724: ...iginal length sensors B and C The machine determines the original width when the leading edge of the original activates the registration sensor The ARDF detects the original size by combining the readings of the four width sensors and two length sensors as shown in the table on the next page B597D110 WMF B B5 C LG A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 725: ... 210 mm A5 S 210 x 148 mm ON B6 L 128 x 182 mm B6 S 182 x 128 mm DLT L 11 x 17 ON ON ON ON ON 11 x 15 L ON ON ON ON ON 10 x 14 L ON ON ON ON LG L 81 2 x 14 ON ON ON F4 L 81 2 x 13 ON ON ON F L 8 x 13 ON ON ON LT L 8 5 x 11 ON ON LT S 11 x 8 5 ON ON ON 71 4 x 101 2 L ON 101 2 x 71 4 S ON ON ON 8 x 10 L ON ON HLT L 51 2 x 81 2 HLT S 81 2 x 51 2 ON 267 x 390 mm ON ON ON ON ON 195 x 267 mm ON ON 267 x...

Page 726: ...rmined the image cannot be correctly scaled reduced or enlarged or processed until the document length has been accurately detected The length must be determined before the image is scanned Auto Reduce Enlarge Centering Erase Center Border Booklet Image Repeat An original follows this path during transport 1 Document length detection Scanning glass Inverter table 2 Inverter table Scanning glass In...

Page 727: ...pick up motor D turns on and the original stopper cam E rotates The original stopper lowers and releases the original Next the pick up roller cam F lowers the pick up roller and then the feed motor G at this location but not shown in the drawing turns on to feed the top sheet of paper After being fed from the pick up roller the top sheet is separated from the stack by the separation roller H and t...

Page 728: ... presses against the skew correction roller C and buckles slightly to correct any skew 4 4 3 REDUCING THE INTERVAL BETWEEN PAGES After performing skew correction the feed motor runs at a speed higher than its original speed in order for the next original to catch up to the one ahead of it This reduces the gap between the leading edge of the next original with the trailing edge of the one ahead Whe...

Page 729: ...e transport roller A and the exit roller B When the leading edge of the original activates the interval sensor C the transport motor rotates the transport roller The transport roller then feeds the original through scanning area After scanning the original is fed out by the exit roller to the exit tray B597D104 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 730: ...es Next the inverter motor turns on and the inverter roller E starts rotating to feed the original from the reverse table Then the original is fed to the transport roller and the scanning area F where the reverse side is scanned After scanning the reverse side of the original the original is then sent to the reverse table G a second time and turned over This ensures that the double sided original ...

Page 731: ... reaches the stamp the transport motor stops and the stamp solenoid turns on if the page is sent successfully immediate transmission or stored successfully memory transmission After stamping the ARDF feed motor re starts to feed out the document NOTE The position of the stamp can be adjusted with the Stamp Position Adjustment SP mode B597D201 WMF A B C CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 732: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 733: ...FAX OPTION B779 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 734: ... ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries Important Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine IMPORTANT ALWAYS OBEY THESE GUIDELINES TO AVOID SERIOUS PROBLEMS SUCH AS MISFEEDS DAMAGE TO ORIGINALS LOSS OF VALUABLE DATA AND TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE MACHINE BOLD IS ADDED FOR EMPHASIS NOTE This inform...

Page 735: ...ic shock from lightning 6 Do not use a telephone or cellular phone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak CAUTION 1 Before installing the fax unit switch off the main switch and disconnect the power cord 2 The fax unit contains a lithium battery The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by...

Page 736: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 737: ... 29 2 4 2 SC1201 29 2 4 3 FAX SC CODE TABLE 30 3 SERVICE TABLES 31 3 1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 31 3 2 BIT SWITCHES 38 3 2 1 SYSTEM SWITCHES 38 3 2 2 I FAX SWITCHES 48 3 2 3 PRINTER SWITCHES 54 3 2 4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES 59 3 2 5 G3 SWITCHES 67 3 2 6 G3 2 3 SWITCHES 73 3 2 7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES 79 3 2 8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES 79 3 2 9 IP FAX SWITCHES 79 3 3 NCU PARAMETERS 85 3 4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSI...

Page 738: ...dling Mail Reception Errors 123 Secure Internet Reception 123 Transfer Request Request by Mail 124 E Mail Options Sub TX Mode 125 Subject and Level of Importance 125 How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type 125 Subjects Displayed on the PC 125 E mail Messages 126 Message Disposition Notification MDN 127 Handling Reports 128 4 5 IP FAX 129 What is IP FAX 129 T 38 Packet Format 129 5 SPECIFICA...

Page 739: ...imile Keytops 2 7 Copy Keytops 2 8 Printed Plate 1 Important The installation procedure of the previous model required the removal of knockouts from the rear lower cover of the machine The rear lower covers of the previous model and this model are identical in that both covers contain these knockouts However removal of these knockouts on the rear lower cover is not required with this installation ...

Page 740: ...off turn the main switch off and then disconnect the power cord and the network cable NOTE This installation procedure uses the following symbols Screws Connectors 1 After removing the accessories from the box read the serial number on the box and write it on the serial number tape provided 2 Attach the serial number tape near the serial number plate of the mainframe 3 Remove the controller unit A...

Page 741: ... board go to page 1 7 If you are installing two G3 boards go to page 1 8 7 After installing the G3 board slide the FCU board A into the right slot of the expansion box 8 Fasten the board with the screws x2 NOTE Make sure that the MBU is seated correctly The machine will issue SC819 SC820 if it is not seated correctly 9 Re install the controller board B779I103 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO...

Page 742: ...9 4 SM 10 Remove dummy keytop A and replace it with the Facsimile keytop B 11 Remove the blank plate C and replace it with the printed plate D 12 Attach the Super G3 decal E B779I901 WMF A C B D E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 743: ...ine and turn on the main power switch Important After you turn the machine on if you see a message that tells you the SRAM has been formatted due to a problem with SRAM turn the machine off and on again to clear the message 17 Enter the User Tools mode and set date and time 18 Do SP3102 and enter the serial number for the fax unit NOTE This is the serial number that you wrote on the plate and atta...

Page 744: ...IT TYPE 3045 1 3 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Description Qty 1 G3 Board 1 2 RJ 45 Connector Bracket 1 3 RJ 45 Connector with Cable 1 4 Flat Film Connector 1 5 Screws 8 6 Cable 1 7 Clamps 2 8 CCUIF 1 B779I903 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 745: ...connector C to the bracket D 4 Set the bracket D and fasten it x2 5 Attach one end of the flat film connector E 6 Attach the CCUIF F x4 7 Attach the other end of the flat film connector G to the CCUIF 8 Attach the G3 board H x2 x1 x2 9 Return to page 3 and complete the installation B779I904 WMF B779I905 WMF A B C D E F G H CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 746: ...e upper board set the second RJ 45 connector E in the bracket NOTE Cut the band E before connecting 5 Attach one end of the flat film connector F 6 Attach the CCUIF G x4 7 Attach the other end of the flat film connector H to the CCUIF 8 Attach the lower G3 board I x2 x1 x2 9 Attach the upper G3 Board J x2 x1 x2 10 Return to page 3 and complete the installation B779I906 WMF B779I907 WMF A B C D E F...

Page 747: ...or has a jammed printer The other party pressed Stop during communication 0 03 Incompatible modem at the other end The other terminal is incompatible 0 04 CFR or FTT not received after modem training Check the line connection Check the NCU FCU connectors Try changing the tx level and or cable equalizer settings Replace the FCU or NCU The other terminal may be faulty try sending to another machine ...

Page 748: ...sending to another machine 0 08 The other end sent RTN or PIN after receiving a page because there were too many errors Check the line connection Check the FCU NCU connectors Replace the NCU or FCU The other end may have jammed or run out of paper or memory space Try adjusting the tx level and or cable equalizer settings The other end may have a defective modem NCU FCU try sending to another machi...

Page 749: ...eck for line problems Try calling another fax machine Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first line and or rx cable equalizer setting Cross reference Reconstruction time G3 Switch 0A bit 6 Rx cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN 0 21 EOL signal end of line from the other end not received within 5 s of the previous EOL signal Check the connections between the FCU NCU line Check for line noi...

Page 750: ...nication Check the line connection Retry communication 0 55 FCE does not detect the SG3 V34 FCU firmware or board defective SG3 V34 firmware or board defective 0 56 The stored message data exceeds the capacity of the mailbox in the SG3 V34 SG3 V34 firmware or board defective 0 70 The communication mode specified in CM JM was not available V 8 calling and called terminal The other terminal did not ...

Page 751: ...ing terminal Try making a call at a later time Try using V 17 or a slower modem using dedicated tx parameters Try increasing the tx level Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting If these errors happen at the receiving terminal Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting Try increasing the tx level Try using V 17 or a slower modem if the same error is frequent when receiving from multiple sen...

Page 752: ...he FCU 2 51 The machine resets itself because of a fatal communication error If this is frequent update the ROM or replace the FCU 2 53 Snd msg in the manual task is an error because the mailbox for the operation task is full The user did the same operation many times and this gave too much load to the machine 4 01 Line current was cut Check the line connector Check the connection between FCU and ...

Page 753: ...d pressed Stop during communication The other terminal may be defective 6 09 G3 ECM ERR received Check for a noisy line Adjust the tx levels of the communicating machines See code 6 05 6 10 G3 ECM error frames still received at the other end after all communication attempts at 2400 bps Check for line noise Adjust the tx level use NCU parameter 01 or the dedicated tx parameter for that address Chec...

Page 754: ...a problem with the SMTP server and to check that the SMTP server settings are correct Folder send destination is incorrect Contact the system administrator to determine that the SMTP server settings and path to the server are correct Device settings incorrect Confirm that the user name and password settings are correct Direct SMTP destination incorrect Contact the system administrator to determine...

Page 755: ... the transmission could not be completed Buffer is full due to using Scan to Email while the buffer is being used send mail at the same time 14 12 Data Size Too Large Transmission was cancelled because the detected size of the file was too large 14 13 Send Cancelled Processing is interrupted because the user pressed Stop 14 30 MCS File Creation Failed Failed to create the MCS file because The numb...

Page 756: ...ection Error The DNS or POP3 IMAP4 server could not be found The IP address for DNS or POP3 IMAP4 server is not stored in the machine The DNS IP address is not registered Network not operating correctly 15 12 Authorization Error POP3 IMAP4 send authorization failed Incorrect IFAX user name or password Access was attempted by another device such as the PC POP3 IMAP4 settings incorrect 15 13 Receive...

Page 757: ... was larger than A3 Compression error File was compressed with other than MH MR or MMR 15 63 TIFF Parameter Error The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be received because the TIFF header is incorrect The TIFF file attachment is a type not supported The TIFF file attachment is corrupted Software error 15 64 TIFF Decompression Error The file received as an attachment caused the TIFF decomp...

Page 758: ...unavailable 22 00 Original length exceeded the maximum scan length Divide the original into more than one page Check the resolution used for scanning Lower the scan resolution if possible Add optional page memory 22 01 Memory overflow while receiving Wait for the files in the queue to be sent Delete unnecessary files from memory Transfer the substitute reception files to an another fax machine if ...

Page 759: ...work setup correct Check the IP address with the administrator of the network 2 Check that PC can connect with the machine Use the ping command on the PC to contact the machine At the MS DOS prompt type ping then the IP address of the machine then press Enter Between IFAX and PC 3 LAN settings in the machine Check the LAN parameters Check if there is an IP address conflict with other PCs Use the N...

Page 760: ...ommunication is performed successfully 1 E mail account on the Server Make sure that the PC can log into the e mail server Check that the account and password stored in the server are the same as in the machine Ask the administrator to check 2 E mail server Make sure that the client devices which have an account in the server can send receive e mail Ask the administrator to check Send a test e mai...

Page 761: ...nnected to the router can sent data over the router Ask the administrator of the server to check Between e mail server and internet 1 Error message by e mail from the network of the destination Check whether e mail can be sent to another address on the same network using the application e mail software Check the error e mail message Inform the administrator of the LAN CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃ...

Page 762: ...r setting other than 1720 Send by specifying the port number 7 Specified port number correct Confirm the port number of the remote fax 8 DNS server registered when host name specified Contact the network administrator 9 Remote fax a T 38 terminal Check whether the remote fax is a T38 terminal 10 Remote fax switched off or busy Check that the remote fax is switched on Request the network administra...

Page 763: ...installed Cannot breach the firewall Send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 8 Transmission sent manually Manual sending not supported 9 IP address of local fax registered Register the IP address 10 DNS registered when host name specified Contact the network administrator 11 Remote fax a G3 fax Check that the remote fax is a G3 fax 12 G3 fax is connected to VoIP gateway Check that G3 fax is ...

Page 764: ...host name specified Contact the network administrator 9 Enable H 323 SW is set to on Check the settings See User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0 10 IP address of local fax registered Register the IP address of the local fax 11 Alias number of local fax registered Register the Alias number of the local fax 12 Remote fax registered in Gatekeeper Contact the network administrator 13 Remote fax a T 38 terminal ...

Page 765: ...Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the receiving side IPFAX SW06 8 Remote fax cancelled transmission Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway Check Point Action 1 LAN cable connected Check the LAN cable connection 2 Firewall NAT is installed Cannot breach the firewall Request the remote fax to send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 3 V...

Page 766: ... sender fax is a Ricoh model 6 DNS server registered when Gatekeeper host name specified on sender s side Contact the network administrator Note The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model 7 Enable H 323 SW is set to on Request the sender to check the settings User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0 Note Only if the remote sender fax is a Ricoh fax 8 Local fax IP address re...

Page 767: ...the fax unit is initialized using one of the following methods Hold down the 7 and 9 keys for more than 10 s Turn off the main power switch and turn it back on 2 4 2 SC1201 When the FCU detects an unrecoverable error in the SRAM which requires a complete SRAM initialization the fax unit displays this SC Code and stops There is no way to recover from this error condition without a complete SRAM ini...

Page 768: ... 0 Sys Switch 1F bit 7 1 1001 FCU error Initialize the fax unit Automatic reset 1201 Unrecoverable FCU SRAM error Refer to section 2 4 2 Service Call display 1299 1305 1310 1311 1312 1401 1405 Software error Initialize the fax unit Automatic reset SC Code display CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 769: ...s for the fax option Section 3 2 Bit Switches Ifax Switch 102 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for the fax option Section 3 2 Bit Switches Printer Switch 103 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax option Section 3 2 Bit Switches Communication Switch 104 001 032 00 1F Change the bit switches for communication settings for the fax option...

Page 770: ...4 board G3 1 NCU Parameters 103 001 023 CC 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the standard G3 board Section 3 3 NCU Parameters G3 2 NCU Parameters 104 001 023 CC 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3 board Section 3 3 NCU Parameters G3 3 NCU Parameters 105 001 023 CC 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3 board Section 3 3 NCU Parameters SP3 XXX Tel Line Settings 3 Mode No Funct...

Page 771: ... line PSTN 3 Port Settings 001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3 3 line If the machine is installed on a PABX line select PABX PABX GND or PABX FLASH 002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3 3 line 003 Memory Lock Disabled If the customer does not want to receive transmissions using Memory Lock on this line change this SP to on 105 004 Transmission Disabled If yo...

Page 772: ...st 64 fax error codes 103 001 G3 1 ROM Version Displays the G3 1 modem version 104 001 G3 2 ROM Version Displays the G3 2 modem version 105 001 G3 3 ROM Version Displays the G3 3 modem version 106 001 G4 ROM Version Not used Do not change the bit switches 107 001 Charge ROM Version Not used Do not change the bit switches CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 773: ...eter List 101 000 Touch the ON button to print the system parameter list Service Monitor Report 102 000 Touch the ON button to print the service monitor report G3 Protocol Dump List 001 G3 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for all G3 lines 103 002 G3 1 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the G3 1 line 003 G3 1 1 Communicat...

Page 774: ... the communication records on the report 106 002 Specified Date The machine prints all communication records after the specified date Log List Print out 001 All log files 002 Printer 003 SC TRAP Stored 004 Decompression 005 Scanner 006 JOB SAF 007 Reconstruction 008 JBIG 009 Fax Driver 010 G3CCU 011 Fax Job 012 CCU 107 013 Scanner Condition These log print out functions are for designer use only I...

Page 775: ...118 G3 3 DTMF Tests 119 G3 3 V34 S2400baud 120 G3 3 V34 S2800baud 121 G3 3 V34 S3000baud 122 G3 3 V34 S3200baud 123 G3 3 V34 S3429baud 124 IG3 1 Modem Tests Not used 125 IG3 1 DTMF Tests Not used 126 IG3 1 V34 S2400baud Not used 127 IG3 1 V34 S2800baud Not used 128 IG3 1 V34 S3000baud Not used 129 IG3 1 V34 S3200baud Not used 130 IG3 1 V34 S3429baud Not used 131 IG3 2 Modem Tests Not used 132 IG3 ...

Page 776: ...he Journal for each G3 communication 2 e g 0000 32V34 288 264 L0100 03 04 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 EQM value Line quality data A larger number means more errors 2 Symbol rate V 34 only 3 Final modem type used 4 Starting data rate for example 288 means 28 8 kbps 5 Final data rate 6 Rx revel refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level 7 Total number of error lines that occurred during n...

Page 777: ...ommunication 7 Not used Do not change the setting G3 Communication Parameters Modem rate 336 33600 bps 168 16800 bps 312 31200 bps 144 14400 bps 288 28800 bps 120 12000 bps 264 26400 bps 96 9600 bps 240 24000 bps 72 7200 bps 216 21600 bps 48 4800 bps 192 19200 bps 24 2400 bps Resolution S Standard 8 x 3 85 dots mm D Detail 8 x 7 7 dots mm F Fine 8 x 15 4 dots mm SF Superfine 16 x 15 4 dots mm 21 S...

Page 778: ...hich is stored in System Switch 03 Note that if an RDS operation takes place RDS will not switch off until this time limit has expired 1 1 At any time an RDS system can access the machine System Switch 03 SP No 1 101 004 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7 Length of time that RDS is temporarily switched on when bits 6 and 7 of System Switch 02 are set to User selectable 00 99 hours BCD This setting is onl...

Page 779: ... include telephone calls 2 Automatic error report printout 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Error reports will not be printed 1 Error reports will be printed automatically after failed communications 3 Printing of the error code on the error report 0 No 1 Yes 1 Error codes are printed on the error reports 4 Not used Do not change this setting 5 Power failure report 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 A power failure rep...

Page 780: ...not change the factory settings System Switch 0B Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 0C Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 0D Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 0E SP No 1 101 015 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 1 Not used Do not change the settings 2 Enable disable for direct sending selection 0 Direct sending off 1 Direct sending on Dire...

Page 781: ...itch 10 SP No 1 101 017 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7 Threshold memory level for parallel memory transmission Threshold N x 128 KB 256 KB N can be between 00 FF H Default setting 02 H 512 KB System Switch 11 SP No 1 101 018 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 TTI printing position 0 Superimposed on the page data 1 Printed before the data leading edge Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information that th...

Page 782: ...tch 15 SP No 1 101 022 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Not used Do not change the settings 1 Going into the Energy Saver mode automatically 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 1 The machine will restart from the Energy Saver mode quickly because the 5V power supply is active even in the Energy Saver mode 2 3 Not used Do not change these settings 4 5 Interval for preventing the machine from entering Energy Saver mode if t...

Page 783: ...sabled 1 Enabled 0 After installing the memory expansion option the scanner page memory is extended to 4 MB from 2 MB 1 If this bit is set to 1 after installing the memory expansion option the scanner page memory is extended to 12 MB But the SAF memory decreases to 18 MB 7 Special Original mode 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form or letterhead which has a co...

Page 784: ... machine cannot print the report e g no paper 1 Action when the SAF memory has become full during scanning 0 The current page is erased 1 The entire file is erased 0 If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning the successfully scanned pages are transmitted 1 If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning the file is erased and no pages are transmitted This bit switch is ignored for parallel mem...

Page 785: ... 2 Not used Do not change the settings 3 Received fax print start timing G3 reception 0 After receiving each page 1 After receiving all pages 0 The machine prints each page immediately after the machine receives it 1 The machine prints the complete message after the machine receives all the pages in the memory 4 6 Not used Do not change the factory settings 7 Action when a fax SC has occurred 0 Au...

Page 786: ...f both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to 1 then the maximum size is A3 Bit 2 When mail is sent there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the destination so the sending machine cannot make a selection for the receiving capabilities original width setting of the receiving machine The original width selected with this switch is used as the RX machine s original width setting and the original is ...

Page 787: ...sion 0 Off No conversion 1 On Conversion When on set to 1 the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters NOTE Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver to determine the setting mail cannot negotiate between terminals the mm inch selection is determined by the sender fax When this switch is Off 0 ...

Page 788: ...ssion was received normally at the destination 2 3 00 Dispatched Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt Receives the Return Receipt with dispatched in the 2nd part Disposition Automatic action MDN send automatically dispatched The dispatched string is included in the Subject string 01 Displayed Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt Receives the Return Receipt with displayed ...

Page 789: ... report after each transfer 1 Returns the report only if an error occurred during transfer Destination Error Handling for Reception Transfer Request 2 This setting restricts transfer transmission based on whether the final destinations are correct or not 0 The transfer station transmits to correct destinations only addresses with no errors in them 1 If any address has an error in it the transfer s...

Page 790: ... post database subject in the following three cases 1 When the service technician sets the service software switch 2 When memory sending or delivery specified by F code is applied by the SMTP server 3 With relay broadcasting 1st stage without the Schmidt 4 function Note This switch does not apply for condition 3 when the RX system is set up for memory sending delivery by F code sending with SMTP R...

Page 791: ...e the settings 4 7 Restrict TX Retries This setting determines the number of retries when connection and transmission fails due to errors 01 F 1 15 Hex I fax Switch 0A Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 102 011 I fax Switch 0B Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 102 012 I fax Switch 0C Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 102 013 I fax Switch 0D Not used do not change the s...

Page 792: ... repeated text 2 Prints the date and time on received fax messages 0 Disabled 1 Enabled This switch is only effective when user parameter 02 bit 2 printing the received date and time on received fax messages is enabled 1 The machine prints the received and printed date and time at the bottom of each received page 3 7 Not used Do not change the settings Printer Switch 01 SP No 1 103 002 No FUNCTION...

Page 793: ...tation usage for fax printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 2 3rd paper feed station usage for fax printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 3 4th paper feed station usage for fax printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 4 LCT usage for fax printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 0 The paper feed station can be used to print fax messages and reports 1 The specified paper feed station will not be used for printing fax messages and reports ...

Page 794: ...If the received document is 10 mm or less longer than A4 then the 10 mm are cut and only 1 page prints If the received document is 10 mm longer than A4 then the document is split into 2 pages Printer Switch 04 SP No 1 103 005 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 4 Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03 0 above Maximum reducible length Paper length N x 5mm N is the decimal va...

Page 795: ...al is reduced to 91 to ensure that there is enough space in the left margin for punch holes or staples 2 3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 List of destinations in the Communication Failure Report for broadcasting 0 All destinations 1 Only destinations where communication failure occurred 1 Only destinations where communication failure occurred are printed on the Communication Failure Report ...

Page 796: ...e sample image is printed at 100 even if page separation occurs User Parameter Switch 19 13H bit 4 must be set to 0 to enable this switch Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on this feature 5 6 Not used Do not change the settings 7 Equalizing the reduction ratio among separated pages Page Separation 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 0 When page separation has taken place all the pages are reduced w...

Page 797: ... be used in the transmission and to be declared in phase B handshaking of the T 30 protocol 4 Not used Do not change the settings 5 JBIG compression method Reception 0 Only basic supported 1 Basic and optional both supported Change the setting when communication problems occur using JBIG compression 6 JBIG compression method Transmission 0 Basic mode priority 1 Optional mode priority Change the se...

Page 798: ...n does not work when dialing is done from the external telephone 4 5 Not used Do not change the setting 6 to 7 Maximum printable page length available Bit 7 6 Setting 0 0 No limit 0 1 B4 364 mm 1 0 A4 297 mm 1 1 Not used The setting determined by these bits is informed to the transmitting terminal in the pre message protocol exchange in the DIS NSF frames Communication Switch 02 SP No 1 104 003 No...

Page 799: ...ing is not used if ECM is switched on Default setting 03 H Communication Switch 04 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 05 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 06 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 07 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 09 Not used do not c...

Page 800: ...ne will only send back a Transfer Result Report if there were errors during communication meaning one or more of the End Receivers could not be contacted 4 Printout of the message when acting as a Transfer Station 0 Disabled 1 Enabled When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station this bit determines whether the machine prints the fax message coming in from the Requesting Terminal 5 Action when ...

Page 801: ...ammed the machine will send the report to Quick 05 Default setting 05 H 5 digits 5 7 Not used Do not change the settings Communication Switch 0D SP No 1 104 014 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7 The available memory threshold below which ringing detection and therefore reception into memory is disabled 00 to FF Hex unit 4 kbytes e g 06 H 24 kbytes One page is about 24 kbytes The machine refers to this s...

Page 802: ... without conversion In memory transmission data stored in the SAF memory in mm format are transmitted without conversion Note When storing the scanned data into SAF memory the fax unit always converts the data into mm format 1 The machine converts the scanned data or stored data in the SAF memory to the format which was specified in the set up protocol DIS NSF before transmission 1 5 Not used Do n...

Page 803: ...g transmission to another maker s machine using the SEP Selective Polling signal is disabled 1 SUB reception 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Confidential reception to another maker s machine using the SUB Sub address signal is disabled 2 PWD reception 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Disables features that require PWD Password signal reception 3 6 Not used Do not change the settings 7 Action when there is no box wit...

Page 804: ...code set bit 3 to 1 Communication Switch 1C SP No 1 104 029 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 1 Extension access code 8 and 9 to turn V 8 protocol On Off 0 On 1 Off Refer to communication switch 1B Example If 8 is the PSTN access code set bit 0 to 1 When the machine detects 8 as the first dialed number it automatically disables V 8 protocol If 9 is the PSTN access code use bit 1 2 7 Not used Do not change...

Page 805: ...es in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will not be transmitted set to 1 if there are communication problems with PC based faxes which cannot receive the extended DIS frames 5 Not used Do not change the setting 6 Forbid CED AMsam output 0 Off 1 On Forbid output Do not change this setting Default 0 Off unless communication problem is caused by a CED or ANSam transmission 7 Not used Do not change the...

Page 806: ...hen using ECM in non standard NSF NSS mode the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving a PPR if the following condition is met in communications at 14 4 12 0 9 6 and 7 2 kbps NTransmit N send Re NTransmit Number of transmitted frames NResend Number of frames to be retransmitted 1 When using ECM the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving four PPRs PP...

Page 807: ... 1 0 0 0 19 2 k 1 0 0 1 21 6 k 1 0 1 0 24 0 k 1 0 1 1 26 4 k 1 1 0 0 28 8 k 1 1 0 1 31 2 k 1 1 1 0 33 6 k Other settings Not used These bits set the initial starting modem rate for transmission Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need to change this for specific receivers If a modem rate 14 4 kbps or slower is selected V 8 protocol should be disabled manually Cross reference V 8 proto...

Page 808: ... 29 V 33 0 1 0 0 V 27ter V 29 V 17 V 33 0 1 0 1 V 27ter V 29 V 17 V33 V 34 Other settings Not used The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available modem type for the machine in receive mode If V 34 is not selected V 8 protocol must be disabled manually Cross reference V 8 protocol on off G3 switch 03 bit2 G3 Switch 07 SP No 1 105 008 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to...

Page 809: ... the settings G3 Switch 09 Not used do not change the settings G3 Switch 0A SP No 1 105 011 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 1 Maximum allowable carrier drop during image data reception Bit 1 Bit 0 Value ms 0 0 200 0 1 400 1 0 800 1 1 Not used These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop time Try using a longer setting if error code 0 22 is frequent 2 Select cancellation of high speed RX if carrier signal...

Page 810: ...3 Switch 0D Not used do not change the settings G3 Switch 0E SP No 1 105 015 0 7 Set CNG send time interval Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the 3 second CNG interval High order bit 3000 2250ms 3000 50xNms 3000 50 x Nms 0F 3000 ms N FF 2250 ms Low order bit 00 0E 3000 3700ms 3000 50xNms 3000 50 x Nms 0F 3000 ms N 0F 3700 ms G3 Switch 0F SP No 1 105 016 No...

Page 811: ...eset these bits after testing 2 Monitor speaker during memory transmission 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 The monitor speaker is enabled during memory transmission 3 7 Not used Do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 01 SP No 1 106 002 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 DIS frame length 0 10 bytes 1 4 bytes 1 The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will not be transmitted ...

Page 812: ...etermining the most suitable rate for the current communication 6 Not used Do not change the settings 7 Short preamble 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual for details about Short Preamble G3 2 Switch 03 SP No 1 106 004 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 DIS detection number Echo countermeasure 0 1 1 2 0 The machine will hang up if it receives the same DIS frame twice 1 Bef...

Page 813: ...ommunications 5 Modem rate used for the next page after receiving a negative code RTN or PIN 0 No change 1 Fallback 1 The machine s tx modem rate will fall back before sending the next page if a negative code is received This bit is ignored if ECM is being used 6 Not used Do not change the settings 7 Select detection of reverse polarity in ringing 0 Off 1 On This switch is used to prevent reverse ...

Page 814: ...type for 9 6 k or 7 2 kbps Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting 0 0 V 29 0 1 V 17 1 0 V 34 1 1 Not used These bits set the initial modem type for 9 6 and 7 2 kbps if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds 6 7 Not used Do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 06 SP No 1 106 007 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 3 Initial Rx modem rate Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting bps 0 0 0 1 2 4 k 0 0 1 0 4 8 k 0 0 1 1 7 2 k 0 1 0 0 9 6 k 0 1 ...

Page 815: ...e of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange Use the dedicated transmission parameters for specific receivers Also try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following symptoms occurs Communication error Modem rate fallback occurs frequently Note This setting is not effective in V 34 communications 2 to 3 PSTN cable equalizer rx mode Internal Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 ...

Page 816: ...ween EOL end of line signals and the maximum interval between ECM frames from the other end Try using a longer setting if error code 0 21 is frequent 5 Not used Do not change the settings 6 Reconstruction time for the first line in receive mode 0 6 s 1 12 s When the sending terminal is controlled by a computer there may be a delay in receiving page data after the local machine accepts set up data ...

Page 817: ...IP Fax uses a double port 4 IP Fax Gatekeeper 0 OFF 1 ON enable Enables disables the gatekeeper for IP Fax 5 IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse 0 LSB first 1 MSB first Reverses the T30 bit signal 6 IP Fax max bit rate setting 0 Not affected 1 Affected When 0 is selected the max bit rate does not affect the value of the DIS DCS When 1 is selected the max bit rate affects the value of the DIS DCS 7 IP Fa...

Page 818: ...ting 1 Internal bit switch setting When 0 is selected the bit signal reverse method is decided by the maker code When 1 is selected the bit signal reverse method is decided by the internal bit switch NOTE When communicating between IP Fax devices LSB first is selected 1 IP Fax transmission speed setting 0 Modem speed 1 No limitation Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax communication 2 SIP transpo...

Page 819: ...elects the ECM frame size for sending 4 DIS detection times for echo prevention 0 1 time 1 2 times Sets the number of times for DIS to detect echoes 5 CTC transmission selection 0 PPRx1 1 PPRx4 When 0 is selected the transmission condition is decided by error frame numbers When 1 is selected the transmission condition is based on the ITU T method 6 Shift down setting at receiving negative code 0 O...

Page 820: ...4800 bps 0 0 1 1 7200 bps 0 1 0 0 9600 bps 0 1 0 1 12 0 Kbps 0 1 1 0 14 4 Kbps 0 1 1 1 16 8 Kbps 1 0 0 0 19 2 Kbps 1 0 0 1 21 6 Kbps 1 0 1 0 24 0 Kbps 1 0 1 1 26 4 Kbps 1 1 0 0 28 8 Kbps 1 1 0 1 31 2 Kbps 1 1 1 0 33 6 Kbps 4 5 Modem setting for transmission Sets the modem for transmission The default is 00 V29 Bit 5 Bit 4 0 0 V29 0 1 V17 1 0 V34 1 1 Not used 6 7 Not used Do not change these settin...

Page 821: ...ut 0 Not transmitted 1 Transmitted Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1 timeout 2 Not used Do not change this setting 3 Hang up setting at DIS reception disabled 0 No hang up 1 Hang up after transmitting DCN Sets whether the machine disconnects after DIS reception 4 Number of times for training 0 1 time 1 2 times Selects the number of times training is done at the same bit rate 5 Space CSI tra...

Page 822: ... 120 sec 1 0 180 sec 1 1 240 sec Adjusts the fail safe timer This timer sets the interval between setup data transmission and T 38 phase decision If your destination return is late on the network or G3 fax return is late adjust the longer interval timer The default is 00 75 seconds 6 7 Not used Do not change these settings Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 35 sec 0 1 40 sec 1 0 50 sec 1 1 60 sec Bit 3 Bit 2 0 0 3 s...

Page 823: ...can be changed using NCU Parameter programming SP2 103 104 and 105 if SP2 103 104 and 105 can be used this will be indicated in the Remarks column The RAM is programmed in hex code unless BCD is included in the Unit column NOTE The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU Change the fourth digit from 5 to 6 e g 680500 to 680600 for the settings for the first optional G3 interface...

Page 824: ...op detect time 20 ms Line current detection is disabled Line current is not detected if 680501 contains FF 680504 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit high byte 680505 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680506 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit high byte 680507 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit low byte Hz BCD If both...

Page 825: ...68051D PABX dial tone reset time HIGH 68051E PABX dial tone continuous tone time 68051F PABX dial tone permissible drop time If 68051B contains FF the machine pauses for the pause time 680520 680521 680520 PABX wait interval LOW 680521 PABX wait interval HIGH 20 ms 680522 PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms 680523 PABX ringback tone off detection time 20 ms If both addresses contain FF H tone ...

Page 826: ...tain FF H tone detection is disabled 680538 International dial tone detection time 680539 International dial tone reset time LOW 68053A International dial tone reset time HIGH 68053B International dial tone continuous tone time 68053C International dial tone permissible drop time If 680538 contains FF the machine pauses for the pause time 68053D 68053E Belgium See Note 2 68053D International dial ...

Page 827: ...MF tone on time SP2 103 018 parameter 17 680551 DTMF tone off time 1 ms SP2 103 019 parameter 18 680552 Tone attenuation level of DTMF signals while dialing N x 0 5 3 5 dBm SP2 103 020 parameter 19 See Note 5 680553 Tone attenuation value difference between high frequency tone and low frequency tone in DTMF signals dBm x 0 5 SP2 103 021 parameter 20 The setting must be less than 5dBm and should no...

Page 828: ...of 0 680565 FF 680566 FF 680567 to 680571 Not used Do not change the settings 680572 Acceptable ringing signal frequency range 1 upper limit SP2 103 003 parameter 02 680573 Acceptable ringing signal frequency range 1 lower limit SP2 103 004 parameter 03 680574 Acceptable ringing signal frequency range 2 upper limit SP2 103 005 parameter 04 680575 Acceptable ringing signal frequency range 2 lower l...

Page 829: ...disabled 6805A3 Acceptable CED detection frequency lower limit high byte 6805A4 Acceptable CED detection frequency lower limit low byte BCD Hz If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 6805A5 CED detection time 20 ms 20 ms Factory setting 200 ms 6805A6 Acceptable CNG detection frequency upper limit high byte 6805A7 Acceptable CNG detection frequency upper limit low byte BCD Hz If b...

Page 830: ...5B5 PSTN 1100 Hz tone transmission level N 6805B4 0 5N 6805B5 3 5 dB See Note 7 6805B6 PSTN 2100 Hz tone transmission level N6805B4 0 5N 6805B6 3 dB See Note 7 6805B7 PABX Tx level from the modem dBm 6805B8 PABX 1100 Hz tone transmission level N 6805B7 0 5N 6805B8 dB 6805B9 PABX 2100 Hz tone transmission level N 6805B7 0 5N 6805B9 dB 6805BD Modem turn on level incoming signal detection level 37 0 ...

Page 831: ...e settings 6805E4 bit 2 Threshold for ring level Change bit 2 to 1 This will increase the threshold for ringing level detection 6805E4 bit 3 On Hook impedance level Change bit 3 0 to 1 This will decrease the on hook impedance level 6805E5 bits 0 and 1 Selection of positive and negative sides of the signal waveform for incoming call detection Bit 0 0 Automatically judged Bit 0 1 Manually select to ...

Page 832: ...y compensates 4 The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2 5 wavelengths after the time specified by this parameter 5 The calculated level must be between 0 and 10 The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are High frequency tone 0 5 x N680552 680554 3 5 dBm 0 5 x N680555 dBm Low frequency tone 0 5 x N680552 680554 N680553 3 5 dBm 0 5 x N680555 N680553 dBm NOTE N680552 for example means...

Page 833: ... Bit Switch 00 to 1 2 Enter Address Book Management mode User Tools System Settings Key Operator Address Book Management 3 Press Program Change Delete Quick Dial 4 Select the address book that you want to program 5 For the fax parameter select Fax Dest for the E mail parameter select E mail then press Start Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights green 6 The settings for the switch 00 ar...

Page 834: ...h a particular remote terminal often contains errors the signal level may be inappropriate Adjust the Tx level for communications with that terminal until the results are better If the setting is Disabled the NCU parameter 01 setting is used Note Do not use settings other than listed on the left 5 to 7 Cable equalizer Bit 7 6 5 Setting 0 0 0 None 0 0 1 Low 0 1 0 Medium 0 1 1 High 1 1 1 Disabled Us...

Page 835: ...ersion before tx Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Inch mm conversion available 0 1 Inch only 1 0 Not used 1 1 Disabled The machine uses inch based resolutions for scanning If inch only is selected the printed copy may be slightly distorted at the other end if that machine uses mm based resolutions If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used 2 to 3 DIS NSF detection method Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting ...

Page 836: ...bled For example if ECM is switched on but is not wanted when sending to a particular terminal use the 0 0 setting Note that V 8 V 34 protocol and JBIG compression are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used Switch 04 Not used do not change the settings Switch 05 Not used do not change the settings Switch 06 Not used do not change the set...

Page 837: ...ression method of e mail attachments 0 Registered Bit 0 to 6 1 No registration The 0 selection default references the settings for Bits 00 01 02 above The 1 selection ignores the selections of Bits 00 01 02 Switch 01 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 00 Original width of e mail attachment A4 0 Off 1 On Sets the original width of the e mail attachment as A4 01 Original width of e mail attachment B4 0 Off 1 On S...

Page 838: ...400 0 Off 1 On Sets the line resolution of the e mail attachment as 400 x 400 05 06 Not used Do not change these settings 07 Designates the bits to reference for original size of e mail attachments 0 Registered Bit 0 to 6 1 No registration The 0 selection default references the settings for Bits 00 01 02 04 above The 1 selection ignores the selections of Bits 00 01 02 04 Switch 03 Not used do not ...

Page 839: ...680090 to 68009F H G3 2 bit switches 6800A0 to 6800AF H G3 3 bit switches 6800D0 H User parameter switch 00 SWUER_00 Not used 6800D1 H User parameter switch 01 SWUSR_01 Not used 6800D2 H User parameter switch 02 SWUSR_02 Bit 0 Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 1 Center mark printing on received copies This switch is not printed on the user parameter list 0 Dis...

Page 840: ... Bit 7 Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0 Off 1 On 6800D5 H User parameter switch 05 SWUSR_05 Bit 0 Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Bits 1 and 2 Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages Paper end toner end jam and during night mode Bit 2 1 Setting 0 0 The machine receives all the fax messages 0 1 The machine recei...

Page 841: ... Off 1 On 6800DB H User parameter switch 11 SWUSR_0B Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 Not used Bits 2 to 5 Not used Bit 6 Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0 Off 1 On Bit 7 Polling Standby duration 0 Once 1 No limit 6800DC H User parameter switch 12 SWUSR_0C Not used 6800DD H User parameter switch 13 SWUSR_0D Not used 6800DE H User parameter switch 14 SWUSR_0E Bit 0 Message pr...

Page 842: ... regardless of entry mode If both email and fax are registered both are selected The Group button reflects either email or fax input mode All registered members are released regardless of the entry mode If both email fax are registered both are released Bits 0 and 1 Not used Bit 2 Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4 LT size paper is not available 0 A3 has priority 1 B4...

Page 843: ...his switch is not printed on the user parameter list 0 Technician adjustment printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4 1 50 reduction Bit 5 Use of A5 size paper for reports This switch is not printed on the user parameter list 0 Off 1 On Bits 6 and 7 Not used 6800E4 H User parameter switch 20 SWUSR_14 Bit 0 Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0 Off 1 On Bit 1 Not used Bits 2 to 5 Store documents ...

Page 844: ... Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03 NOTE This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user see system switch 02 Bits 5 to 7 Not used 6800EA H to 6800EF H User parameter switch 26 to 31 SWUSR_1A to 1F Not used 6800F0 H User parameter switch 32 SWUSR_20 Bit 0 Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the specified type 0 Paper ou...

Page 845: ...0306 H TTI 3 Max 64 characters ASCII See following note 680307 to 68031A H PSTN 1 CSI Max 20 characters ASCII 68031B to 68032E H PSTN 2 CSI Max 20 characters ASCII 68032F to 680342 H PSTN 3 CSI Max 20 characters ASCII 680343 H Number of PSTN 1 CSI characters Hex 680344 H Number of PSTN 2 CSI characters Hex 680345 H Number of PSTN 3 CSI characters Hex NOTE If the number of characters is less than t...

Page 846: ... 69ED04 to 69F003 H SIP server address Read only 69ED04 H Proxy server Main Max 128 characters ASCII 69ED84 H Proxy server Sub Max 128 characters ASCII 69EE04 H Redirect server Main Max 128 characters ASCII 69EE04 H Redirect server Sub Max 128 characters ASCII 69EF04 H Registrar server Main Max 128 characters ASCII 69EF04 H Registrar server Sub Max 128 characters ASCII 69F004 H Gatekeeper server a...

Page 847: ... port number for H 232 connection 6A10D6 H RAS back up server RAS port number 6BEBFE H Dial tone detection frequency Upper limit High Defaults NA 06 EU 06 ASIA 06 6BEBFF H Dial tone detection frequency Upper Limit Low Defaults NA 50 EU 50 ASIA 50 6BEC00 H Dial tone detection frequency Lower Limit High Defaults NA 03 EU 02 ASIA 02 6BEC01 H Dial tone detection frequency Lower Limit Low Defaults NA 6...

Page 848: ...1 Extra G3 Interface option This provides one more analog line interface This allows full dual access Two extra G3 interface options can be installed 2 Memory Expansion This expands the SAF memory and the page memory used for image rotation without this expansion the page memory is not big enough for image rotation at 400 dpi so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible MBU CCUDRV CCUIF SG3 SG3 GWFC...

Page 849: ...tion Control Engine CPU Data compression and reconstruction DCR DMA control Clock generation DRAM backup control Modem FAME V 34 V33 V17 V 29 V 27ter V 21 and V 8 BICU FCU FACE3 SAF BACKUP SDRAM 16MB DIMM 32 MB DMA BUS CPU BUS MBU SRAM 256kB FROM 3MB BACKUP RESET FCUIF PCI BUS CCUDRV CCUIF v 34 MODEM Speaker Drive Speaker NCU Circuit Line TEL G3 G3 B779D902 WMF CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTR...

Page 850: ...ta and user parameters Even if the FCU is changed the system data and user parameters are kept on the MBU board ROM 3MB flash ROMs for system software storage 2MB 16bit x 1MB 1MB 16bit x 512K SRAM The 256 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a lithium battery Memory back up A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in the SRAM in case the base c...

Page 851: ... with the FCU is done through this block DMA controller JBIG DSP V34 modem RL5T892 Includes the DTMF Receiver function DCR for MH MR MMR and JBIG compression and decompression FROM 1Mbyte flash ROM for SG3 software storage and modem software storage SDRAM 4Mbyte DRAM shared between ECM buffer line buffer and working memory AFE Analog Front End Analog processing CODEC COder DECoder A D D A conversi...

Page 852: ...4 SM 4 3 VIDEO DATA PATH 4 3 1 TRANSMISSION SCANNER BICU FBI FACE3 Page Memory DCR SAF DCR QM CODER FCU DCR QM CODER NCCP SG3 Modem NCU Analog G3 Modem NCU Analog G3 B779D904 WMF1 WMF CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 853: ...terminal The BICU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU NOTE When scanning a fax original the BICU uses the MTF independent dot erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit s scanner bit switches not the copier s SP modes Then the FCU stores the data in page memory and compresses the data for transmission The NCU transmits the data to the line JBIG Transmissi...

Page 854: ...on the telephone number dialed by the other party the optional G3 unit has a different telephone number from the main fax board JBIG Reception When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN 1 the standard analog line the data is sent to the QM CODER for decompression Then the data is stored in the page memory and transferred to the BICU When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN 2 optional e...

Page 855: ...erface Unit is installed communication can take place at the same time through the two or three lines at once Option Available Line Type Available protocol Combinations Standard only PSTN G3 Extra G3 Interface Unit single PSTN PSTN G3 G3 Extra G3 Interface Unit double PSTN PSTN PSTN G3 G3 G3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 856: ...ver can be used for the fax transmission in many times More than one document and the scanned document can be combined into one file and then the file can be transmitted When using the document server the SAF memory is not used The document is compressed with MMR and stored Up to 9 000 pages can be stored 1 file Up to 1 000 pages from the fax application Only stored documents from the fax applicat...

Page 857: ...ir contents are as follows Field Content From Mail address of the sender Reply To Destination requested for reply To Mail address of the destination Bcc Backup mail address Subject From CSI or RTI Fax Message No xxxx Content Type Multipart mixed Attached files image tiff Content Transfer Encoding Base 64 7 bit 8 bit Quoted Printable Message Body MIME converted TIFF F MIME standards specify how fil...

Page 858: ...olution is enabled with IFAX SW01 The requirements for originals document size scan width and memory capacity are the same as for G3 fax memory tx The default compression is TIFF F format IFAX SW00 Acceptable paper widths for sending IFAX SW09 Maximum number of attempts to the same destination Secure Internet Transmission SMTP Authentication User Tools System Settings File Transfer SMTP Authentica...

Page 859: ...reception is enabled However if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the MX record of the DNS server then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used depending on the setting User Tools System Settings File Transfer Reception Protocol Mail Delivery Conditions Transferring Mail Received With SMTP 1 The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery User Tools Facsimile Features E mail Se...

Page 860: ...t delivered IFAX ricoh co jp Does not match and is not delivered 2 Conditions The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming mail do not match the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered and the SMTP server responds with an error However in this case an error report is not output If the Access Limit Entr...

Page 861: ...CII ISO 8859 X Other types cannot be handled and some garbage may appear in the data Content Transfer Encoding Base 64 7 bit 8 bit Quoted Printable 2 MIME decoding errors 3 File format not recognized as TIFF F format 4 Resolution document size or compression type cannot be accepted Remaining SAF capacity error The machine calls the server but does not receive e mail if the remaining SAF capacity i...

Page 862: ... From E mail address of the requesting terminal To Destination address Transfer Station address Bcc Backup mail address Subject From TSI Fax Message No xxxx Content Type Multipart mixed Text Plain for a text part image tiff for attached files Content Transfer Encoding Base 64 7 Bit 8 bit Quoted Printable Mail body text part RELAY ID xxxx xxxx 4 digits for an ID code RELAY 01 X 01 Message body MIME...

Page 863: ...ed No Subject Entry 4 None CSI RTI not registered Fax Message No File No 1 CSI RTI 2 RTI CSI not registered Normal Return Receipt dispatched You can select displayed with IFAX SW02 Bits 2 and 3 3 CSI RTI not registered Confirmation of Reception From 4 None CSI RTI not registered Error Return Receipt processed error RTI or CSI of the station designated for delivery Mail delivery RTI or CSI of sende...

Page 864: ...b TX Mode E mail Options An e mail message up to 5 lines can be pre registered with User Tools System Settings File Transfer Program Change Delete E mail Message Limitations on Entries Item Maximum Number of Lines 5 lines Line Length 80 characters Name Length 20 characters CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 865: ...equest unless the two conditions below are met The other party s machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request The other party s machine must support MDN Message Disposition Notification Setting up the Receiving Party The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if 1 The Disposition Notification To field is in the received mail header automatically inserted in the 4...

Page 866: ...l as a separate communication Its arrival is only reported by the presence of OK or E in the Result column If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list i e a Group destination the machine sends the mail to more than one location See How to set up Mail Delivery the Result column of the Journal is updated every time a return receipt is received For example if the mailing list was ...

Page 867: ... 0 Level 2 0 0 1 1 Level 3 Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too many transmission errors are occurring on the network If TCP UDP is enabled on the network raise this setting on the T 30 machine Increasing the delay time allows the recovery of more lost packets If only UDP is enabled increase the number of redundant packets Level 1 2 3 Redundant packets Level 3 4 Redundant packets 4...

Page 868: ...olution G3 8 x 3 85 lines mm Standard 8 x 7 7 lines mm Detail 8 x 15 4 line mm Fine Note1 16 x15 4 line mm Super Fine See Note 1 200 x 100 dpi Standard 200 x 200 dpi Detail 400 x 400 dpi Super Fine See Note 1 NOTE 1 Optional Expansion Memory required Transmission Time G3 3 s at 28800 bps Measured with G3 ECM using memory for an ITU T 1 test document Slerexe letter at standard resolution Data Compr...

Page 869: ...ial 2000 Groups 100 Destination per Group 500 Destinations dialed from the ten key pad overall 500 Programs 100 Auto Document 6 Communication records for Journal stored in the memory 200 Specific Senders 30 The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memory are installed Without the Expansion Memor...

Page 870: ...ndent device E mail server Line conditions No terminal access Document Size Maximum message width is A4 LT Note To use B4 and A3 width IFAX SW00 Bit 1 B4 and or Bit 2 A3 must be set to 1 E mail File Format Single multi part MIME conversion Image TIFF F MH MR MMR Protocol Transmission SMTP TCP IP Reception POP3 SMTP IMAP4 TCP IP Data rate 100 Mbps 100base Tx 10 Mbps 10base T Authentication method S...

Page 871: ...imum A3 or 11 x 17 DLT Maximum scanning size Standard A3 297mm x 432mm Irregular 297mm x 1200mm Transmission protocol Recommended T 38 Annex protocol TCP UDP IP communication Compatible machines IP Fax compatible machines IP Fax transmission function Specify IP address and send fax to an IP Fax compatible fax through a network Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax connected to the public telep...

Page 872: ...FCU Interface B799 1 Included with fax unit Interface Board 5 G3 Board B780 6 Included with optional G3 unit Expansion Memory G578 4 Common with B180 Handset Type 1018 Common with B003 B079 Marker Type 30 H903 A646 Refill for stamp ink B779V101 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 873: ...D315 PRINTER SCANNER OPTION CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 874: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 875: ... ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries Important Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine Important Always obey these guidelines to avoid serious problems such as misfeeds damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine bold is added for emphasis NOTE This inform...

Page 876: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 877: ...2 1 2 5 APPLICATION MERGE MAPS 13 SD Application Merge Maps 13 Basic or Fax 14 Printer Function 14 Fax Printer 14 Scanner Fax Printer 14 1 3 OTHER OPTIONS 15 1 3 1 IEEE 1284 B679 15 1 3 2 IEEE 802 11B INTERFACE KIT G813 16 1 3 3 BLUETOOTH UNIT 3245 B826 19 1 3 4 POSTSCRIPT 3 UNIT D319 20 1 3 5 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER B609 21 1 4 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS 22 2 SERVICE TABLES 23 2 1 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE ...

Page 878: ...D315 ii SM 4 2 4 BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATIONS 28 4 2 5 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS 29 4 2 6 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES 29 PRINTER 29 Printer Drivers 29 SCANNER 30 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 879: ...e options listed in the table below are used both B195 B198 B264 B265 Series machines as well as B291 B295 B296 B297 Series machines No Item Slots B609 File Format Converter Type B Board Slot 1 or 2 B826 Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245 G813 IEEE 802 11b Interface Unit Type H B679 IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A Board Slot 1 or 2 Only one of these boards can be installed at one time B735 Data O...

Page 880: ...optional boards are inserted here see the next page Slot SD Card C1 RPCS Printer Unit or Printer Unit or Printer Scanner Unit or Data Overwrite Security if no printer unit is installed if a printer or printer scanner card is installed you can merge the DOS card with either card C2 PostScript3 C3 Service slot for firmware version updates moving applications to other SD cards and downloading uploadi...

Page 881: ...ng boards Slot Board 1 or 2 File Format Converter B609 MLB 1 or 2 Bluetooth Interface Unit B736 1 1 or 2 IEEE802 11b G813 Wireless LAN 1 1 or 2 IEEE1284 Interface Board B679 Centronics 1 1 Only one of these boards can be installed at one time D315I100 WMF CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 882: ...re only basic copying and printing and the RPCS printer language The 256 MB memory is required Printer Scanner Unit Type 4500 For customers who require the full range of DS features advanced scanning and printing features such as scan to solutions virtual mailboxes PCL etc The 256 MB memory unit is required D315I901 WMF Main Machine RPCS Printer Unit D317 256 MB RPCS SD Printer Enhance Option D319...

Page 883: ... MB memory PostScript 3 Unit The PS3 option can be used with the RPCS Printer Unit or the Printer Scanner Unit Enhance Options There are two enhance options Printer Enhance Option Type 4500 Updates the RPCS Printer Unit by adding PCL Scanner Enhance Option Type 4500 Updates the RPCS Printer Unit by adding the advanced scanning features Network Enhance Option Type 4500P Updates the RPCS Printer Uni...

Page 884: ...nts Description Qty RPCS NEO P S PEO SEO 256 MB Memory 1 1 Yes No Yes No No 1 SD Card 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 Stamp Cartridge 1 No Yes Yes No Yes 3 Ferrite Core 1 No Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 NA Keytop Set 3 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 5 EU Keytop Set 3 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 The 256 Memory is a separate option and it is not provided in the kits However one memory unit is required for the installation of every pri...

Page 885: ...ALLATION CAUTION TURN OFF THE MAIN POWER SWITCH AND DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD 1 Remove the controller cover x2 2 Remove controller board A x4 3 Install the 256 MB memory DIMM A 4 Reinstall the controller board B783I902 WMF B783I103 WMF A A CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 886: ... 3rd blank keytop from the top is reserved for the Fax keytop Do not remove it at this time 11 Replace the blank keytops Copy Document Server Printer Scanner 12 Connect the machine s power cord and turn the main power switch on 13 Enable the NIB and or USB function To enable the NIB function enter the SP mode and set SP5985 001 On Board NIC to 1 Enable To enable the USB function enter the SP mode ...

Page 887: ...er limit sensor Proceed to the Paper Sensor Installation next page 1 Peel off the black tape A from the anti static brush B then pull out the cable C 2 Connect the cable to the sensor D NOTE Push the connector into the hole so it is not visible 3 Install the paper limit sensor unit E x 2 B654I901 WMF B654I902 WMF A C B D E CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 888: ...nstalled install the Paper Limit Sensor Installation previous page 1 Remove the connector cover A and bridge unit B x 2 x 2 2 Open the right cover C of the bridge unit and peel off the black tape D 3 Pull out the connector E 4 Install the paper sensor F x 1 x 1 then reinstall the bridge unit B654I903 WMF B654I904 WMF A B C D E F CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 889: ... RPCS Printer Unit SD card is in SD card Slot C1 4 Put the option SD Card Printer Enhance Option or Scanner Enhance Option in SD card slot C3 5 Open the front door 6 Turn the copier on 7 Go into the SP mode and select SP5873 001 8 Touch Execute 9 Read the instructions on the display and touch Execute to start 10 When the display tells you copying is completed touch Exit then turn the copier off 11...

Page 890: ...SD Cards Here are some basic rules about merging applications on SD cards The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program to the target SD card The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is licensed to use the application program The service technician may occasionally need to check the SD card and its data to solve problems SD cards must be stored in a sa...

Page 891: ...bles The shaded areas in the Slot 1 rows indicate which applications must be merged with the underlined SD cards The merge operation must be done with SP5873 C1 RPCS RPCS Printer Unit SD card must reside in C1 PEO SEO The Printer Enhance Option PEO Scanner Enhance Option SEO or Network Enhance Option NEO must be merged with the RPCS SD card in C1 using SP5873 001 Important Where 2 or more merge op...

Page 892: ...RPCS RPCS RPCS RPCS PEO DOS DOS NEO DOS DOS PEO PEO NEO C2 PS3 PS3 NEO PS3 NEO PS3 C3 Note In configurations 3 and 6 above note that the print enhance option PEO may reside in C2 if the PS3 option is not used Scanner Fax Printer 1 2 3 4 5 C1 P S P S P S P S RPCS DOS DOS PEO SEO C2 PS3 PS3 C3 6 7 8 9 10 C1 RPCS RPCS RPCS RPCS RPCS PEO DOS DOS PEO PEO SEO SEO SEO DOS DOS SEO SEO C2 PS3 PS3 PS3 C3 CÓ...

Page 893: ... SWITCH AND DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD NOTE You can only install one of these network interfaces IEEE 802 11b Wireless LAN IEEE1284 Parallel Centronics or Bluetooth 1 Remove the cover A of board Slot 1 or 2 x1 2 Install the interface board B x2 knob screws NOTE Use a screwdriver to tighten the knob screws Do not tighten manually because this can disconnect the board 3 Reattach the cover x1 B...

Page 894: ...l one of these network interfaces IEEE 802 11b Wireless LAN IEEE1284 Parallel Centronics or Bluetooth 1 Remove the cover A of board Slot 1 or 2 x1 2 Attach the interface board B to the controller board x1 knob screw NOTE Use a screwdriver to tighten the knob screws Do not tighten manually because this can disconnect the board 3 With the printed side facing the front of the machine insert the inter...

Page 895: ...wed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries 8 WEP Encryption Setting The WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy setting is designed to protect wireless data transmission The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded data There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys WEP Selects Active or Inactive Inactive is default Range of Allowed Settings 64 bit 10 characte...

Page 896: ... SP No Name Function 5840 006 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the country 5840 007 Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed for your country 5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key Default 00 UP mode Name Function SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting WEP Mode Used to sh...

Page 897: ...s LAN IEEE1284 Parallel Centronics or Bluetooth 1 Remove the cover A of board Slot 1 or 2 x1 2 Attach the conductive tape B to the Bluetooth card Important Attach the tape to the card on the side of the card opposite to the position shown at B 3 Attach the interface board C to the controller board x2 knob screws NOTE Use a screwdriver to tighten the knob screws Do not tighten manually because this...

Page 898: ...tion SD Card 1 2 Decal 1 CAUTION TURN OFF THE MAIN POWER SWITCH AND DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD 1 Remove the cover A x1 2 With the printed side of the SD card B facing the rear of the machine install the SD card in SD card slot C2 3 Reattach the cover x1 4 Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 decal to the front cover B783I908 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 899: ...TURN OFF THE MAIN POWER SWITCH AND DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD 1 Remove the cover A of Board Slot 1 or 2 x1 2 Install the board B x2 knob screws NOTE Use a screwdriver to tighten the knob screw Do not tighten manually because this can disconnect the board 3 Reattach the cover x1 Important This option also requires installation of the Printer Scanner Unit D315 B783I909 WMF A B CÓPIA NÃO CONTRO...

Page 900: ... switch 2 Enter the printer user mode and print the configuration page User Tools Printer Settings List Test Print Config Page NOTE The same data can also be printed by executing SP1 004 Print Summary All installed options are listed in the System Reference column CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 901: ...ogram DFU 1004 Print Summary Prints the printer summary sheet 1005 Display Version Displays the version of the controller firmware 1006 Sample Proof Print 0 1 0 1 0 Link with Doc Server 1 Enable 7910 PDL Part No Information Returns a text string for the version RPCS 150 R55 156 PDF 162 PS 151 RTIFF 157 BMLinks 163 RPDL 152 PCL 156 PICTBRIDG E 164 R98 153 PCLXL 159 FONT 180 R16 154 MSIS 160 FONT1 1...

Page 902: ...k TWAIN scanner driver 0 Not forbidden can use TWAIN 1 Forbid using TWAIN driver SP Number Name Function Setting Compression level grayscale 2021 These SP codes set the compression ratio for the grayscale processing mode that can be selected with the notch settings on the operation panel Range 5 lowest ratio ÅÆ 95 highest ratio 1 Level 3 Middle I Qual 5 95 40 1 step 2 Level 2 High I Qual 5 95 50 1...

Page 903: ...nsitive information Hold Print New Documents are stored on the printer HDD similar to a locked print but printing does not require a password entry Stored Print New Documents are stored on the printer HDD and printed as needed This is useful for documents that are printed frequently applications catalogs etc Printer Features Comparison Table Model Feature Storage Capacity Sort by User ID Multiple ...

Page 904: ...r 2 Memory 256 MB G818 USB 2 0 NIB Network Interface Built into controller board PostScript 3 2 D319 SD Card C2 Printer Scanner Unit D315 SD Card C1 RPCS Printer Unit D317 SP Card C1 1 Only one of these boards can be installed at one time 2 If both PS3 and DOS Data Overwrite Security B735 are required DOS must be moved to the Printer Scanner or RPCS Printer SD card with SP5878 1 D315I100 WMF CÓPIA...

Page 905: ...S3 600 dpi PCL5e 300 600 dpi PCLXL 600 dpi Resident Fonts PCL TrueType 10 Intellifont 35 International 13 Bitmap 1 PS3 Option fonts PS3 Connectivity Std RJ 45 network port 100BASE TX 10BASE T USB 2 0 Option IEEE802 11b Wireless LAN Bluetooth IEEE1284 Centronics Parallel Network Protocols TCP IP IPX SPX SMB NetBIOS over TCP IP AppleTalk Auto Switching RAM Maximum 384 MB Resident 128 MB Additional 2...

Page 906: ... m 219 yd 2 Mbps 270 m 295 yd Data transmission rates 1 Mbps 400 m 437 yd Network protocols TCP IP Apple Talk NetBEUI IPX SPX SMB Bandwidth 2 4GHz divided over 14 channels 2400 to 2497 MHz for each channel 4 2 4 BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATIONS Transmission Specifications Based on Bluetooth V1 1 Data Transfer Speed 1 Mbps Profile Hard Copy Cable Replacement Profile HCRP Serial Port Profile SPP BIP Distanc...

Page 907: ...riginals per file Maximum 1 000 pages Maximum of files 3000 files Max Storage on Doc Svr 9 000 pages B W ITUT No 1 200 dpi MMR 4 2 6 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES PRINTER The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD ROM An auto run installer allows you to select which components to install Printer Drivers Printer Language Windows 95 98 Me Windows NT4 0 Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 Macinto...

Page 908: ... Peer to peer printing utility and parallel recovery printing functions are included LAN Fax M7 Driver Win 95 98 Me NT4 2000 XP This driver allows use of the LAN Fax functions by installing the LAN Fax driver Address Book and LAN Fax Cover Sheet Editor PS Utility for Mac This software provides several convenient functions for printing from Macintosh clients Acrobat Reader A utility that allows rea...

Search results

Summary of Contents for Aficio MP 3500 Series

Reviews:

Related manuals for Aficio MP 3500 Series

Brands by name

Popular brands

Ricoh Aficio MP 3500 Series, Service Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for Aficio MP 3500 Series

Reviews:

Related manuals for Aficio MP 3500 Series

Brands by name

Popular brands